Varispeed V7 MANUAL

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 256

YASKAWA

Varispeed V7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COMPACT GENERAL-PURPOSE INVERTER
(VOLTAGE VECTOR CONTROL)
FOR DeviceNet COMMUNICATIONS

Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions
thoroughly and retain them for future reference.

YASKAWA MANUAL NO. TOE-S606-13C


PREFACE

Yaskawa’s Varispeed V7 is a small and simple Inverter; as easy to use as a


contactor. This instruction manual describes installation, maintenance,
inspection, troubleshooting, and specifications of the Varispeed V7. Read
this instruction manual thoroughly before operation.

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

General Precautions
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with protective covers or shields
removed in order to show detail with more clarity. Make sure all covers and
shields are replaced before operating the product.
• This manual may be modified when necessary because of improvements to
the product, modifications, or changes in specifications.
Such modifications are indicated by revising the manual number.
• To order a copy of this manual, or if your copy has been damaged or lost,
contact your Yaskawa representative.
• Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the
user, since that will void the guarantee.

1
NOTATION FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read this instruction manual thoroughly before installation, operation, mainte-
nance, or inspection of the Varispeed V7. In this manual, safety precautions are
classified as either warnings or cautions and are indicated as shown below.

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Even items classified as cautions may result in serious accidents in some situa-
tions. Always follow these important precautions.

NOTE : Indicates information to insure proper operation.

2
PRECAUTIONS FOR UL/cUL MARKING
• Do not connect or disconnect wiring, or perform signal checks while the
power supply is turned ON.
• The Inverter internal capacitor is still charged even after the power supply
is turned OFF. To prevent electric shock, disconnect all power before ser-
vicing the Inverter, and then wait at least one minute after the power sup-
ply is disconnected. Confirm that all indicators are OFF before
proceeding.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter. The
Inverter is an electronic device that uses semiconductors, and is thus vul-
nerable to high voltage.
• Do not remove the Digital Operator or the blank cover unless the power
supply is turned OFF. Never touch the printed circuit board (PCB) while
the power supply is turned ON.
• This Inverter is not suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering more
than 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (200 V Class
Inverters) or 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum (400 V
Class Inverters).

CAUTION
• Use 75°C copper wire or equivalent.
Low voltage wires must be wired with Class I Wiring.

PRECAUTIONS FOR CE MARKINGS


• Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protection class 1 and
overvoltage category II is provided with control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to conform to
CE requirements.
• For 400 V class Inverters, make sure to ground the supply neutral to con-
form to CE requirements.
• For conformance to EMC directives, refer to the relevant manuals for the
requirements.
Document No. EZZ008389 for Japanese version,
Document No. EZZ008390 for English version

3
RECEIVING THE PRODUCT

CAUTION
(Ref. page)

• Do not install or operate any Inverter that is 19


damaged or has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or
equipment damage.

MOUNTING

CAUTION
(Ref. page)

• Lift the Inverter by the heatsinks. When moving 24


the Inverter, never lift it by the plastic case or the
terminal cover.
Otherwise, the main unit may fall and be damaged.
• Mount the Inverter on nonflammable material 24
(i.e., metal).
Failure to observe this caution may result in a fire.
• When mounting Inverters in an enclosure, install 24
a fan or other cooling device to keep the intake
air temperature below 50°C (122°F) for IP20
(open chassis type), or below 40°C (105°F) for
NEMA 1 (TYPE 1), IP20 (top closed type).
Overheating may cause a fire or damage the Inverter.
• The Varispeed V7 generates heat. For effective 25
cooling, mount it vertically.
Refer to the figure in Mounting Dimensions on
page 25.

4
WIRING

WARNING
(Ref. page)

• Only begin wiring after verifying that the power 28


supply is turned OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock or a fire.
• Wiring should be performed only by qualified 28
personnel.
Failure to observe this warning may Result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check 28
the wiring thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

• Always ground the ground terminal . 36


(200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V
Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less)
Failure to observe this warning may Result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• For 400 V class, make sure to ground the sup- 28
ply neutral.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock or a fire.
• The motor will start automatically if the power 40
supply is turned ON while the RUN signal is ON.
Turn ON the power supply only after confirming
that the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make 159
the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-
function input terminal parameter is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

5
CAUTION
(Ref. page)

• Verify that the Inverter rated voltage coincides


with the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal
injury or a fire.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on the
Inverter.
Performing withstand voltage tests may damage
semiconductor elements.
• To connect a Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor 36
Unit, or Braking Unit, follow the procedure
described in this manual.
Improper connection may cause a fire.
• Always tighten terminal screws of the main cir- 28
cuit and the control circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a mal-
function, damage, or a fire.
• Never connect the AC main circuit power supply 28
to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3.
The Inverter will be damaged and the guarantee will
be voided.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires or connec-
tors while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• To store the constant with an ENTER command 126
by communications, be sure to take measures
for an emergency stop by using the external ter-
minals.
Delayed response may cause injury or damage the
machine.

6
OPERATION

WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Only turn ON the input power supply after con-
firming that the Digital Operator or blank cover
(optional) are in place. Do not remove the
Digital Operator, remove the covers, or set
rotary switches while current is flowing.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock.
• Never operate the Digital Operator or DIP
switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock.
• Never touch the terminals while current is flow-
ing, even if the Inverter is stopping.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock.
• When the fault retry function is selected, stand 148
clear of the Inverter or the load. The Inverter
may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.
• When continuous operation after power recov- 144
ery is selected, stand clear of the Inverter or the
load. The Inverter may restart suddenly after
stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.
• The Digital Operator stop button can be dis-
abled by a setting in the Inverter. Install a sepa-
rate emergency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
7
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• If an alarm is reset with the operation signal ON, 40
the Inverter will restart automatically. Reset an
alarm only after verifying that the operation sig-
nal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make 159
the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-
function input terminal parameter is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

CAUTION
(Ref. page)

• Never touch the heatsinks, which can be


extremely hot.
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful
burns to the body.
• It is easy to change operation speed from low to
high. Verify the safe working range of the motor
and machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
and machine damage.
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• All the constants set in the Inverter have been 41
preset at the factory. Do not change the settings
unnecessarily.
The Inverter may be damaged.

8
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

WARNING
(Ref. page)

• Never touch high-voltage terminals on the


Inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
trical shock.
• Disconnect all power before performing mainte-
nance or inspection, and then wait at least one
minute after the power supply is disconnected.
Confirm that all indicators are OFF before pro-
ceeding.
If the indicators are not OFF, the capacitors are still
charged and can be dangerous.
• Do not perform withstand voltage test on any
part of the Varispeed V7.
The Inverter is an electronic device that uses semi-
conductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
• Only authorized personnel should be permitted 202
to perform maintenance, inspection, or parts
replacement.
(Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.)
before starting work.)
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical
shock.)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in an
electric shock.

9
CAUTION
(Ref. page)

• The control PCB employs CMOS ICs.


Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, connectors, 202
or the cooling fan while power is applied to the
circuit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.

OTHERS

WARNING
• Never modify the product.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electrical shock or
injury and will void the guarantee.

CAUTION
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fiuorine,
chlovine, bromine, and iodine, at any time even during trans-
portation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.

10
WARNING LABEL
A warning label is provided on the front cover of the Inverter, as shown below.
Follow the warnings when handling the Inverter.
Plastic Case

Status
Indicators

Nameplate
Warning Label Location

International Certification Marks

11
English and French Warning Labels
Warning Labels at End of Instruction Manual
An English warning label is attached when the English
Varispeed V7 is shipped.
If a Japanese or French label is required, attach
the warning label at the end of the Instruction
Manual over the Japanese warning label.

French

Japanese

Warning Label

Example: 3-phase (200 V Class, 1.5 kW) Inverter

12
WARRANTY INFORMATION
„ Free Warranty Period and Scope
† Warranty Period
This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to
Yaskawa’s customer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of
shipment from Yaskawa’s factory, whichever comes first.
† Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer. However,
upon request, Yaskawa or one of Yaskawa’s Service Centers can inspect
the product for a fee. In this case, if after conferring with the customer, a
Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship
or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, then this
fee will be waived and the problem remedied free of charge.
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workman-
ship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period,
Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective product, and
provide shipping to and from the site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the
problem with a Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawa’s
workmanship or materials, then the customer will be responsible for the
cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside the scope
of this warranty are:
• Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or
other reasons where the customer is determined to be responsible.
• Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa prod-
uct without Yaskawa’s understanding.
• Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that
do not meet the recommended specifications.
• Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
• Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or
materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within Japan.
However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan
for a reasonable fee. Contact your local Yaskawa representative for
more information.
13
„ Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products
due to Yaskawa's defective products whether within or outside the war-
ranty period are NOT covered by this warranty.

RESTRICTIONS
• The Varispeed V7 was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or
systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or health.
• Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for
devices or systems relating to transportation, health care, space aviation,
atomic or electric power, or underwater use must contact their Yaskawa
representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office beforehand.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guide-
lines. However, if this product is to be installed in any location where fail-
ure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or
loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a serious acci-
dent or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the
likelihood of any accident.

14
CONTENTS
NOTATION FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - - - - - - 2
1. Receiving the Product - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 19
■ Checking the Nameplate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20
2. Identifying the Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 21
3. Mounting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24
■ Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24
■ Mounting Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
■ Mounting/Removing Components- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26
4. Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28
■ Wiring Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 29
■ Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 30
■ Wiring the Main Circuits- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36
■ Wiring the Control Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38
■ Wiring the DeviceNet Communications Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - 39
■ Wiring Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40

5. Operating the Inverter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 41


■ Test Run - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 42
† Operation Check Points- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 43
■ Operating the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 44
† Description of Status Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45
■ Function Indicator Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 47
† MNTR Multi-function Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 48
† Input/Output Terminal Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51
■ Simple Data Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications - - - 55
■ Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
■ Component Names and Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56
15
† Rotary Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56
■ Description of the DeviceNet Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57
† Initial Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57
† I/O Message Communications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59
† Explicit Message Communications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 94
■ Error Code Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116
† Explicit Message Communications Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116
† MEMOBUS I/O Instance Error Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 117
■ MEMOBUS Register Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 119
7. Programming Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
■ Constant Setup and Initialization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
† Constant Selection/Initialization (n001) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
■ Using V/f Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 129
† Adjusting Torque According to Application - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 129
■ Using Vector Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 132
† Precautions for Voltage Vector Control Application - - - - - - - - 132
† Motor Constant Calculation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133
† V/f Pattern during Vector Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 134
■ Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135
† How to Select LOCAL/REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
■ Selecting RUN/STOP Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
† LOCAL Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
† REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 137
† Operating (RUN/STOP Commands) Using DeviceNet
Communications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 137
■ Selecting Frequency Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 137
† LOCAL Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 137
† REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 138
■ Setting Operation Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 139
† Reverse Run Prohibit (n006)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 139
† Multi-step Speed Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 139
† Operating at Low Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141
† Adjusting Speed Setting Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141
† Adjusitng Frequency Upper and Lower Limits- - - - - - - - - - - - 142
16
† Using Two Acceleration/Deceleration Times - - - - - - - - - - - - 143
† Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method (n081) - - - - - - 144
† S-curve Selection (n023) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 145
† Torque Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 146
† Frequency Detection Level (n095) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 147
† Jump Frequencies (n083 to n086) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 148
† Continuing Operation Using Automatic Retry Attempts (n082) 148
† Operating a Coasting Motor without Tripping - - - - - - - - - - - - 149
† Holding Acceleration/Deceleration Temporarily - - - - - - - - - - 150
† Reducing Motor Noise or Leakage Current Using Carrier
Frequency Selection (n080) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 151
† Operator Stop Key Selection (n007) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 154
■ Selecting the Stopping Method- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155
† Stopping Method Selection (n005) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155
† Applying DC Injection Braking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 156
■ Building Interface Circuits with External Devices - - - - - - - - - 157
† Using Input Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 157
† Using the Multi-function Analog Inputs (n077, n078)- - - - - - - 162
† Using Output Signals (n057, n058, n059) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 164
■ Preventing the Motor from Stalling (Current Limit) - - - - - - - - 167
† Stall Prevention during Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 169
■ Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 171
† Slip Compensation (n002 = 0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 171
■ Motor Protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 172
† Motor Overload Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 172
■ Selecting Cooling Fan Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 174
■ Using Energy-saving Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 174
† Energy-saving Control Selection (n139) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 174
† Energy-saving Search Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176
† Motor Code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 178
■ Using PID Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 179
† PID Control Selection (n128) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 179
■ Using Constant Copy Function- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 186
† Constant Copy Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 186
† READ Function- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 188

17
† COPY Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 189
† VERIFY Function- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
† Inverter Capacity Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 192
† Software No. Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194
† Display List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194
■ Unit Selection for Frequency Reference Setting/Display - - - - 196
■ Selecting Processing for Frequency Reference Loss (n064) - 198
■ Input/Output Open-phase Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 199
■ Undertorque Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200
8. Maintenance and Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - 202
■ Periodic Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 203
■ Part Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 204
† Replacement of Cooling Fan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 205

9. Fault Diagnosis - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 207


■ Protective and Diagnostic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 207
† Corrective Actions of Models with Blank Cover - - - - - - - - - - - 207
† Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator - - - - - - - - 208
† Errors Indicated by the DeviceNet Communications
Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 218
■ Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 220
10. Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 223
■ Standard Specifications (200 V Class) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 223
■ Standard Specifications (400 V Class) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 227
■ Standard Wiring- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 231
■ Sequence Input Connection with NPN/PNP Transistor - - - - - 234
■ Dimensions/Heat Loss (Unit: mm) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 236
■ Recommended Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 239
■ Constants List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 242
Revision History

18
1. Receiving the Product

1. Receiving the Product


CAUTION Do not install or operate any Inverter that is damaged or
has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or
equipment damage.

After unpacking the Varispeed V7, check the following.


• Verify that the model number matches your purchase order or packing
slip.
• Check the Inverter for physical damage that may have occurred during
shipping.
If any part of Varispeed V7 is missing or damaged, call for service immedi-
ately.

19
„ Checking the Nameplate
Example for 3-phase, 200-VAC, 0.1-kW (0.13-HP) Inverter

Inverter model CIMR-V7NA20P1


Input spec.
Output spec.
Lot No. Mass
Serial No. Software number

Model NA
Applicable maximum motor output
Inverter 200 V class 400 V class
OP1 0.1 kW
Varispeed V7 Series OP2 0.25 kW 0.37 kW
OP4 0.55 kW 0.55 kW
OP7 1.1 kW 1.1 kW
1P5 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
No. Type 2P2 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
N With Digital Operator (with potentiometer) 3P0 3.0 kW
M With Digital Operator (without potentiometer) 3P7 3.7 kW 3.7 kW
P Without Digital Operator 5P5 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
Note: Contact your Yaskawa representatives 7P5 7.5 kW 7.5 kW
for models without heatsinks. No. Voltage Class
B Single-phase 200 VAC
2 Three-phase 200 VAC
4 Three-phase 400 VAC

No. Specifications
Specifications A
C
Standard
European standards
U American standards

B Single-phase 200 VAC Applicable maximum motor output No. Protective structure
2 Three-phase 200 VAC 200 V class 400 V class Open chassis
4 Three-phase 400 VAC OP1 0.1 kW 0 (IP20)*1
OP2 0.25 kW 0.37 kW Enclosed wall-mounted
OP4 1 (NEMA1)*2
0.55 kW 0.55 kW
OP7 1.1 kW 1.1 kW Open chassis (IP20, IP00)*1
1P5 1.5 kW 7
1.5 kW top-closed type

2P2 2.2 kW 2.2 kW


3P0
*1 These OP1 to 3P7 Inverters meet IP20 standards.
3.0 kW
When mounting the 5P5 and 7P5 Inverters in a
3P7 3.7 kW 3.7 kW panel, always remove the top and bottom covers.
5P5 5.5 kW 5.5 kW (In this case, the Inverter meets IP00 standards.)
7P5 7.5 kW 7.5 kW 2
* These OP1 to 3P7 Inverters have the NEMA1 option.
The standard 5P5 and 7P5 Inverters meet NEMA1
standards.

20
2. Identifying the Parts

2. Identifying the Parts


Digital Operator
Terminal Cover
DeviceNet Communi-
cations Cable Hole

Opening for Control


Circuit Wiring Front Cover

Opening for Main


Circuit Wiring Nameplate

Ground Terminal

Heatsink
Cooling Fan Bottom Cover
Cooling Fan Cover

Ground wire connecting DeviceNet communications


cable’s shield to ground terminal
Note: The wire connects the shield to the
ground terminal inside inverters of
5.5 kW or 7.5 kW.

Digital operator
(with potentiometer)
JVOP-140U
sed for setting or
changing constants.
Frequency can be set
using potentiometer.

21
Varispeed V7 Inverters with the Covers Removed

Frequency Setting Potentiometer

Inverter Operation
Baud Rate Setting Switch
Status Indicators

MAC ID Setting Switches Input Polarity Switch

Jumper Bar Control Circuit Terminal Block

Main Circuit Terminal Block


DeviceNet Terminal Block

Ground Terminals

Example for 3-phase (200 V Class, 1.5 kW) Inverter

Frequency Setting Potentiometer

Inverter Operation
Status Indicators

Baud Rate Setting


Switch Input Polarity Switch

MAC ID Setting Switches


Control Circuit Terminal Block
DeviceNet Terminal Block

Jumper Bar
Main Circuit Terminal Block

Ground Terminals

Example for 3-phase (200 V Class, 0.1 kW) Inverter

22
2. Identifying the Parts

Main Circuit Terminal Arrangement


The terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminals depends on the
Inverter model.

CIMR-V7 20P1 to 20P7, B0P1 to B0P4

CIMR-V7 21P5, 22P2, B0P7, B1P5, 40P2 to 42P2

CIMR-V7 24P0, B2P2, 43P0, 43P7

CIMR-V7 B3P7

CIMR-V7 25P5, 27P5, 45P5, 47P5

23
3. Mounting
„ Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter
Be sure the Inverter is protected from the following conditions.
• Extreme cold and heat. Use only within the specified ambient tem-
perature range:
−10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F) for IP20 (open chassis type),
−10 to 40°C (14 to 105°F) for NEMA 11 (TYPE 1), IP 20 (top
closed type)
• Rain and moisture
• Oil sprays and splashes
• Salt spray
• Direct sunlight (Avoid using outdoors.)
• Corrosive gases (e.g., sulfurized gas) or liquids
• Dust or metallic particles in the air
• Physical shock or vibration
• Magnetic noise (Examples: Welding machines, power devices, etc.)
• High humidity
• Radioactive substances
• Combustibles, such as thinner or solvents

24
3. Mounting

„ Mounting Dimensions
To mount the Varispeed V7, the dimensions shown below are required.

a a
Air
100 mm (3.94 in.)
min.

100 mm (3.94 in.) Air


min.

Voltage Class Max. Applicable Distance “a”


Motor Capacity
200 V, Single phase 3.7 kW max. 30 mm min.
or Three phase
400 V, Three phase
200 V, Three phase 5.5 kW 50 mm min.
400 V, Three phase
7.5 kW

CAUTION • Lift the Inverter by the heatsinks. When moving the


Inverter, never lift it by the plastic case or the termi-
nal cover.
Otherwise, the main unit may fall and be damaged.
• The Varispeed V7 generates heat. For effective cool-
ing, mount it vertically.

25
• The dimensions shown for the distances on the left/right
IMPORTANT and top/bottom of the Inverter apply to both mounting
within a panel (IP00 and IP20) and enclosed models
(NEMA1).
• When operating a 5.5-kW or 7.5-kW Inverter (200 V or
400 V Class) within a panel, always remove the top and
bottom covers.

„ Mounting/Removing Components
Removing and Mounting the Digital Operator and Covers
• Removing the Front Cover
Use a screwdriver to loosen the
screw on the front cover and 1
then remove it in direction 1. 2
Then press the right and left
sides in direction 2 and lift the
front cover in direction 3. 3
2
• Mounting the Front Cover
Mount the front cover by revers-
ing the order of the above proce-
dure for removal.

• Removing the Terminal Cover


1
After removing the front cover,
press the right and left sides of
the terminal cover in direction 1
and lift the terminal cover in 2
direction 2.
• Mounting the Terminal Cover 1
Mount the terminal cover by
reversing the order of the above
procedure for removal.

26
3. Mounting

• Removing the Digital Operator


After removing the front cover,
lift the upper and lower sides A
(section A) of the right side of
the Digital Operator in direction
1. A

• Mounting the Digital Operator


Mount the Digital Operator by
reversing the order of the above
procedure for removal.

• Removing the Bottom Cover


After removing the front cover
and the terminal cover, tilt the
bottom cover in direction 1 with
section A as a supporting point.
• Mounting the Bottom Cover A
Mount the bottom cover by
reversing the order of the above A
procedure for removal.

27
4. Wiring
WARNING • Only begin wiring after verifying that the power sup-
ply is turned OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• Wiring should be performed only by qualified per-
sonnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check the
wiring thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• For 400 V class, make sure to ground the supply
neutral.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.

• Verify that the Inverter rated voltage coincides with


CAUTION
the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution may result in per-
sonal injury or a fire.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on the
Inverter.
Performing withstand voltage tests may damage
semiconductor elements.
• Always tighten terminal screws of the main circuit
and the control circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a mal-
function, damage, or a fire.
• Never connect the AC main circuit power supply to
output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, −, +1,
or +2.
The Inverter will be damaged and the guarantee will
be voided.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors
while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• To store the constant with an ENTER command by
communications, be sure to take measures for an
28
4. Wiring

emergency stop by using the external terminals.


Delayed response may cause injury or damage the
machine.

„ Wiring Instructions
1. Always connect the power supply for the main circuit inputs to the
power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 (R/L1, S/L2 for single-
phase power) via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a fuse.
Never connect the power supply to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1,
B2, −, +1, or +2. The Inverter may be damaged.
For 200 V single-phase Inverters, always use terminals R/L1 and S/
L2. Never connect terminal T/L3.
Refer to page 239 for recommended peripheral devices.
Use a UL class RK5 fuse. For single-phase, 200-V Inverters of
075 kW or less, a 3-phase, 200-V power supply can also be con-
nected.
Inverter Power Supply Connection Terminals

200-V 3-phase Input 200-V Single Input 400-V 3-phase Input


Power Supply Speci- Power Supply Speci- Power Supply Speci-
fication Inverters fication Inverters fication Inverters
CIMR-V7††2††† CIMR-V7††B††† CIMR-V7††4†††
Connect to R/L1, Connect to R/L1 and Connect to R/L1,
S/L2, and T/L3. S/L2. S/L2, and T/L3.

2. If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long, reduce the
Inverter carrier frequency. For details, refer to Reducing Motor
Noise or Leakage Current (n080) on page 151. Control wiring must
be less than 50 m (164 ft) in length and must be separated from
power wiring. Use shielded twisted-pair cable when inputting the
frequency signal externally.
3. For 400 V Class Inverters, always ground the supply neutral to con-
form to CE requirements.
4. Closed-loop connectors should be used when wiring to the main cir-
cuit terminals.

29
5. Voltage drop should be considered when determining the wire size.
Voltage drop can be calculated using the following equation:
Phase-to-phase voltage drop (V)
= 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wiring distance (m) × current
(A) × 10-3
Select a wire size so that voltage drop will be less than 2% of the
normal rated voltage. Increase the wire size according to the length
of the cable if there is a possibility that the voltage may drop.

„ Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes


1. Control Circuits
Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tighten- Wires
ing
Torque Applicable Size Recom- Type
N•m mended Size
(lb•in)

mm2 AWG mm2 AWG

Same for S1 to S4, P1, P2, M2 0.22 to Twist- 20 to 0.75 18 Shielded


all mod- SC, PC 0.25 ed 18, or equiva-
els (1.94 to wires: 20 to lent
2.21) 0.5 to 16
0.75,
Sin-
gle:
0.5 to
1.25

2. DeviceNet Terminal Block (CN6)


Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tighten- Wires
ing
Torque Applicable Size Recom- Type
N•m mended Size
(lb•in)

mm2 AWG mm2 AWG

Same for V−, CAN_L, M3 0.5 to Twist- 24 to Thin


all mod- shield, CAN_H, 0.6 ed 12 DeviceNet
els V+ wires: cable that
0.2 to meets
2.5 DeviceNet
cable
specifica-
tions

Note: When removing the DeviceNet terminal block, hold the control circuit
terminal block (TB1).

30
4. Wiring

3. Main Circuits

200 V Class 3-phase Input Inverters


Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tighten- Wires
ing
Torque Applicable Size Recommended Type
N•m Size
(lb•in)

mm2 AWG mm2 AWG

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 18 to 2 14 600 V


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 to 2 14 vinyl-
20P1 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88) sheathed
or equiva-
lent

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 18 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 to 2 14
20P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 18 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 to 2 14
20P4 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 18 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 to 2 14
20P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
21P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31) 3.5 12

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 3.5 12


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
22P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 5.5 10


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
23P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

Note: The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).

31
200 V Class Single-phase Input Inverters
Model Terminal Sym- Screws Tighten- Wires
bols ing
Torque Applicable Size Recommended Type
N•m Size
(lb•in)

mm2 AWG mm2 AWG

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 to 18 to 2 14 600 V


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 2 14 vinyl-
B0P1 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88) sheathed
or equiva-
lent

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 to 18 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 2 14
B0P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M3.5 0.8 to 0.75 to 18 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.0 (7.1 2 14
B0P4 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 to 8.88)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 3.5 12


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
B0P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, -, +1, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 5.5 10


V7∗∗ +2, B1, B2, U/T1, 1.5 5.5 10
B1P5 V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, -, +1, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 5.5 10


V7∗∗ +2, B1, B2, U/T1, 1.5 5.5 10
B2P2 V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, -, +1, M5 3.0 3.5 to 12 to 8 8 8


V7∗∗ +2, B1, B2, U/T1, (26.62) 8
B3P7 V/T2, W/T3

M4 1.2 to 2 to 8 14 to
1.5 10
(10.65
to
13.31)

32
4. Wiring

Model Terminal Sym- Screws Tighten- Wires


bols ing
Torque Applicable Size Recommended Type
N•m Size
(lb•in)

mm 2 AWG mm 2 AWG

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M5 2.5 5.5 to 10 to 8 8 8 600 V


V7∗A -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 8 vinyl-
25P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 sheathed
wire or
equivalent

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M5 2.5 5.5 to 10 to 8 8 8


V7∗A -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 8
27P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Note: 1. The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
2. Three-phase power can also be input for 0.1 to 1.1-kW, Single-phase
Input Inverters.

33
400 V Class 3-phase Input Inverters
Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tighten- Wires
ing
Torque Applicable Size Recommended Type
N•m Size
(lb•in)

mm2 AWG mm2 AWG

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14 600 V


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10 vinyl-
40P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65 sheathed
to or equiva-
13.31) lent

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
40P4 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
40P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
41P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
42P2 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31)

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
43P0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31) 3.5 12

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.2 to 2 to 14 to 2 14


V7∗∗ -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 1.5 5.5 10
43P7 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10.65
to
13.31) 3.5 12

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M4 1.4 3.5 to 12 to 5.5 10


V7∗A -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 5.5 10
45P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

34
4. Wiring

Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tighten- Wires


ing
Torque Applicable Size Recommended Type
N•m Size
(lb•in)

mm 2 AWG mm 2 AWG

CIMR- R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, M5 2.5 5.5 to 10 to 8 5.5 10 600 V


V7∗A -, +1, +2, B1, B2, 8 vinyl-
47P5 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 sheathed
wire or
equivalent

Note: The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).

35
„ Wiring the Main Circuits
RST

Circuit Breaker
for Wiring

Ground

• Main Circuit Input Power Supply


Always connect the power supply line to input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 (R/L1, S/
L2 for single-phase Inverters). Never connect them to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1,
B2, −, +1, or +2. The Inverter may be damaged if the wrong terminals are connected.

For single-phase Inverters, always use terminals R/L1 and S/L2. Never connect
NOTE terminal T/L3.

• Grounding (Use ground terminal .)

WARNING Always ground the ground terminal according to local


grounding codes.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock
or a fire.

Never ground the Varispeed V7 to the same ground as welding machines, motors, or other
electrical equipment.
When several Varispeed V7 Inverters are used side by side, ground each as shown in exam-
ples. Do not loop the ground wires.

Good Good Poor

36
4. Wiring

• Braking Resistor Connection (Optional)

WARNING To connect the braking resistor, cut the protector on terminals


B1 and B2.
To protect the braking resistor from overheating, install a ther-
mal overload relay between the braking resistor and the
Inverter. This provides a sequence that turns OFF the power
supply with thermal relay trip contacts.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire.
Use this same procedure when connecting a Braking Resistor Unit.
Refer to page 232.
• Inverter Output
Connect the motor terminals to U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
• Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals
Pass the cables through wiring hole to connect them. Always mount the cover in its origi-
nal position.

Connect with a Phillips screwdriver.

37
„ Wiring the Control Circuits
Pass the cable through wiring hole to connect it. Always mount the
cover in its original position.

S2 can be changed according to sequence input signal (S1 to S7) polar-


ity.
0 V common: NPN side (Factory setting)
+24 V common: PNP side
Refer to pages 234 and 235 for S2.
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminals Screwdriver Blade Width

2.5 mm max
0.4 mm max (0.098 in.)
(0.016 in.)

Insert the wire into the lower part of the terminal block and connect
it tightly with a screwdriver.
5.5 mm
(0.22 in.)
The wire sheath strip length must be 5.5 mm (0.22 in.).

38
4. Wiring

„ Wiring the DeviceNet Communications Cable


Use the following procedure to wire the DeviceNet communications
cable to the terminal block (CN6).
1. Use a thin slotted screwdriver to loosen the terminal screws.
2. Insert the power supply wires into the terminal block from below.
3. Tighten the terminal screws securely so that the power supply wires
will not come out of the terminal block.
Terminal Block (CN6) Wiring Example

Terminal Name Wire Color Description


Color
Black V− Black Communications pow-
er supply GND
Blue CAN_L Blue Communications data
low
Colorless Shield (Shield) Shield wire
White CAN_H White Communications data
high
Red V+ Red Communications pow-
er supply +24 VDC

Terminal block

Black Blue White Red

Strip about 5.5 mm (1/4 inch)


of the wire sheath.

Power supply wire

Black Blue White Red

* 1. Always use thin DeviceNet cable that meets DeviceNet cable specifica-
tions.
* 2. Match the color of the power supply wires with the color of the terminal
block terminals when wiring.
39
* 3. Route the DeviceNet communications cables separately from the main
circuit wiring and other power lines.
* 4. There is a 5.5-mm scale on the front of the Inverter just above the terminal
block. Use this 5.5-mm scale to confirm the length of exposed wire when
stripping wires.
* 5. An external 24-V Power Supply is required for DeviceNet communica-
tions.
* 6. Connect terminators (121 Ω, ±1%, 1/4 W) to both ends of the communica-
tions line.

Open the front cover and verify that the strip length is 5.5 mm
(0.22 in.).

Scale

„ Wiring Inspection
After completing wiring, check the following.
• Wiring is proper.
• Wire clippings or screws are not left in the Inverter.
• Screws are securely tightened.
• Bare wires in the terminals do not contact other terminals.

WARNING If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD (or


REV) RUN command is given, the motor will start
automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the
RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

If the FWD (or REV) RUN command is given when the RUN
NOTE command from the control circuit terminal is selected (n003
= 1), the motor will start automatically after the main circuit
input power supply is turned ON.

40
5. Operating the Inverter

5. Operating the Inverter


The Control Mode Selection (n002) is initially set to V/f control mode.

WARNING • Only turn ON the input power supply after confirm-


ing that the Digital Operator or blank cover
(optional) are in place. Do not remove the Digital
Operator or the covers while current is flowing.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never operate the Digital Operator or DIP switches
with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never touch the terminals while current is flowing,
even if the Inverter is stopping.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.

• Never touch the heatsinks, which can be extremely


CAUTION
hot.
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful
burns to the body.
• It is easy to change operation speed from low to
high. Verify the safe working range of the motor and
machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
and machine damage.
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• All the constants set in the Inverter have been preset
at the factory. Do not change the settings unneces-
sarily.
The Inverter may be damaged.

41
„ Test Run
The Inverter operates when a frequency (speed) is set.
There are four operating modes for the Varispeed V7:
1. RUN command from the Digital Operator (potentiometer/digital set-
ting)
2. RUN command from the control circuit terminals
3. RUN command from DeviceNet communications
Prior to shipping, the Inverter is set up to receive the RUN command
and frequency reference from the Operator. Below are instructions for
running the Varispeed V7 using the JVOP-147 Digital Operator (with-
out potentiometer). For instructions on operation, refer to page 53.
Operation reference or frequency reference constants can be selected
separately as shown below.
Name Constant

RUN Com- n003 = 0 --- Enables run, stop, and reset from Digital Operator.
mand Selec- = 1 --- Enables run and stop from control circuit terminals.
tion = 3 --- Enables DeviceNet communications.

Frequency n004 = 0 --- Enables the Digital Operator’s potentiometer setting.


Reference = 1 --- Enables Frequency Reference 1 (constant n024).
Selection = 7 --- Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
= 8 --- Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
= 9 --- Enables DeviceNet communications.

42
5. Operating the Inverter

Operation Steps Operator Function Status Indi-


Display Indicators cators

1. Turn the potentiometer fully counter- 0


clockwise, and then turn the power
ON. FOR
2. F/R will flash. or
Select FWD or REV RUN using the REV
keys.

Never select REV when


NOTE reverse run is prohibited.
0

0 to 1800
3. Press DSPL to make FREF flash. (r/min)
Then press RUN. Minimum
4. Operate the motor by turning the output
potentiometer clockwise. (A fre- frequen-
quency reference corresponding to cy is
the potentiometer position will be dis- 45 r/min
played.)

If the potentiometer is
NOTE switched rapidly, the motor
also accelerates or deceler-
ate rapidly in proportion to the
potentiometer movement.
Pay attention to load status
and switch the potentiometer
at a speed that will not
adversely affect motor move-
ment.

Status indicators : ON : Flashing : OFF

† Operation Check Points


• Motor rotates smoothly.
• Motor rotates in the correct direction.
• Motor does not have abnormal vibration or noise.
• Acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
• Current matching the load flows.
• Status indicators and Digital Operator display are correct.

43
„ Operating the Digital Operator
All functions of the Varispeed V7 are set using the Digital Operator.
Below are descriptions of the display and keypad sections.

JVOP-140 Digital Operator


Data display section
Indicator/display section

Function indicators
Indicators switch to another
function each time
is pressed.
The displayed data can
be changed.
Frequency setting
Press to switch potentiometer
between Used to change
functions. frequency setting.

Press to enter the


constant data.
(Displays the constant Press to increase Status indicator Press to run
constant No./data the motor.
data when (same function as
value.
RUN indicator)
selecting a constant no.
for indicator.)
Operator CN2 terminal Press to decrease Press to stop the motor.
constant no./data
value. (Press to reset faults.)

(Rear side of the operator)

CN2-3: GND for Operator circuit terminal


CN2-2: Operator circuit terminal
CN2-1: Operator circuit terminal (current reference)
(voltage reference)

Details of Indicators (Color in parenthesis indicates the color of indicator.)


FREF FOUT IOUT MNTR
Frequency reference Output frequency Output current Multi-function
setting/monitoring monitoring monitoring monitoring
(GREEN) (GREEN) (GREEN) (GREEN)

F/R
LO/RE PRGM
Operator RUN
LOCAL/REMOTE Constant no./data
command FWD/REV
Selection (RED)
selection
(RED)
(GREEN)

44
5. Operating the Inverter

† Description of Status Indicators


The following diagram shows the positions of four status indicators
(two Inverter operation status indicators, two DeviceNet communica-
tions status indicators). The combinations of these indicators indicate
the status of the Inverter and DeviceNet communications (On, flashing,
and OFF).
RUN Inverter Operation
ALARM
Status Indicators

DeviceNet
Communications
Status Indicators

Inverter Operation Status Indicators


:ON :Flashing (long flashing) :Flashing :OFF

RUN (Green)
Ramp to Normal
Operation ready
(During stop) stop operation
ALARM (Red)

For details on how the status indicators function for Inverter faults, refer
to Chapter 9. Fault Diagnosis. If a fault occurs, the ALARM indicator
will light.

The fault can be reset by turning ON the FAULT RESET sig-


NOTE
nal (or by pressing the key on the Digital Operator)
with the operation signal OFF, or by turning OFF the power
supply. If the operation signal is ON, the fault cannot be reset
using the FAULT RESET signal.

45
DeviceNet Communications Status Indicators
These indicators show the status of DeviceNet communications.

Name Indication Operating Status Remarks

Color Status

MS Green ON Inverter communica- The Inverter is operat-


tions operating ing normally.

Green Flashing Inverter communica- There is an incorrect


tions initializing baud rate setting or
there is a MAC ID du-
plication.

Red ON Fatal error occurred A fatal (irrecoverable)


error occurred in the
Inverter.

Red Flashing Non-fatal error oc- A non-fatal (recover-


curred able) error occurred.

--- OFF Power supply OFF DeviceNet communica-


tions are not online.
Network power is not
being supplied to the
Inverter.

NS Green ON Online communications DeviceNet communica-


established. tions are operating nor-
mally.

Green Flashing Online communications DeviceNet communica-


not established. tions are operating nor-
mally, but
communications have
not been established
with the Master.

Red ON Communications error An error occurred that


disables DeviceNet
communications.
• MAC ID duplication
• Bus Off detected

Red Flashing Communications time- A communications tim-


out eout occurred with the
Master.

--- OFF Offline or Power sup- DeviceNet communica-


ply OFF tions are not online.
Power is not being sup-
plied to the Inverter.
The baud rate settings
do not agree.

46
5. Operating the Inverter

„ Function Indicator Description


By pressing on the Digital Operator, each of the function indi-
cators can be selected.
The following flowchart describes each function indicator.

Power ON

Frequency reference setting/monitoring


(r/min)
Sets Varispeed V7 operating speed.

Output frequency monitoring (r/min)


Displays frequency that Varispeed V7 is
currently outputting If the Varispeed V7
Setting disabled. loses power while in
one of these modes,
it will return to the same
Output current monitoring (A) mode once power is
Displays current that Varispeed V7 is
currently outputting restored.
Setting disabled.

Monitor No.
U-01: Frequency reference (FREF)
Multi-function monitoring U-02: Output frequency (FOUT)
Description of the selected monitor is U-03: Output current (IOUT)
displayed. U-04: Output voltage reference (Unit: 1V)
(Refer to page 49 for details.) U-05: DC voltage (Unit: 1V)
U-06: Input terminal status
U-07: Output terminal status
U-08: Torque monitor
U-09: Fault history
FWD/REV run selection U-10: Software number
Sets the motor rotation direction when the RUN U-11: Output power
command is given from the Digital Operator. U-16: PID feedback
Setting can be changed using the or key. U-17: PID input
(forward run) (reverse run) U-18: PID output
U-60: DeviceNet produced connection path
U-61: DeviceNet consumed connection path
U-62: MAC ID Setting (on Rotary Switches)
U-63: MAC ID Setting (during operation)
U-64: Baud Rate Setting (on Rotary Switch)
U-65: Baud Rate Setting (during operation)
U-66: DeviceNet Connection instance status
U-70: Frequency reference from DeviceNet

Note: The unit used for frequency is determined by the value set for constant
n035. For details, refer to page 196.

47
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
This function switches the operation; operation
using the digital operator including frequency
setting with potentiometer, operation using the
input terminals, or operation through communications
Setting can be changed using the or key.

(Local) (Remote)

Constant No./data
Sets and changes data for a constant No.
(Refer to page 52.)

Return to

† MNTR Multi-function Monitoring


Selecting the Monitor
Press the key. When is ON, data
can be displayed by selecting the monitor number.

Example: Monitoring the Output Voltage Reference

or
Select U-04 by
pressing the Output voltage reference
or key. is displayed.

48
5. Operating the Inverter

Monitoring
The following items can be monitored using U constants.
Constant Name Unit Description
No.

U-01 Frequency Reference r/ Frequency reference can be monitored. (Same as


(FREF)*1*5 min FREF)

U-02 Output Frequency r/ Output frequency can be monitored.


(FOUT)*1*5 min (Same as FOUT)

U-03 Output Current (IOUT)*1 A Output current can be monitored.


(Same as IOUT)

U-04 Output Voltage V Output voltage can be monitored.

U-05 DC Voltage V Main circuit DC voltage can be monitored.

U-06 Input Terminal Status*2 - Input terminal status of control circuit terminals can
be monitored.

U-07 Output Terminal Status*2 - Output terminal status of control circuit terminals can
be monitored.

U-08 Torque Monitor % The amount of output torque can be monitored.


When V/f control mode is selected, “---” is displayed.

U-09 Fault History - The last four fault history records are displayed.
(Last 4 Faults)

U-10 Software No. - Software number can be checked.

U-11 Output Power*3 kW Output power can be monitored.

U-16 PID Feedback*4 % Input 100(%)/Max. output frequency or equivalent

U-17 PID Input*4 % ±100(%)/± Max. output frequency

U-18 PID Output*4 % ±100(%)/± Max. output frequency

U-60 DeviceNet produced Connec- 70: Basic I/O Instance, Response


tion Path (Connection Path Dur- 71: Extended I/O Instance, Response
ing Operation) 150: MEMOBUS I/O Instance, Response
151: V7N Control I/O Instance, Response
152: Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control I/O In-
stance, Response
155: Extended MEMOBUS I/O Instance, Response
156: General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instance,
Response
20: Basic I/O Instance, Command
21: Extended I/O Instance, Command
100: MEMOBUS I/O Instance, Command
101: V7N Control I/O Instance, Command
102: Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control I/O In-
stance, Command
105: Extended MEMOBUS I/O Instance, Command
106: General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instance,
Command

49
Constant Name Unit Description
No.

U-61 DeviceNet consumed Connec- 20: Basic I/O Instance, Command


tion Path (Connection Path Dur- 21: Extended I/O Instance, Command
ing Operation) 100: MEMOBUS I/O Instance, Command
101: V7N Control I/O Instance, Command
102: Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control I/O In-
stance, Command
105: Extended MEMOBUS I/O Instance, Command
106: General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instance,
Command

U-62 MAC ID Selection (Setting on 0 to 63


Rotary Switches)

U-63 MAC ID Setting (MAC ID during 0 to 63


Operation)

U-64 Baud Rate Setting (Setting on 0: 125 kbps


Rotary Switch) 1: 250 kbps
2: 500 kbps

U-65 Baud Rate Setting (Baud Rate 125: 125 kbps


during Operation) 250: 250 kbps
500: 500 kbps

U-66 Status of DeviceNet 1st digit: Status of explicit instance


connection instance 0: No instance exists in the network or one is now
being prepared.
1: Waiting to be connected to the master while on-
line.
2: Waiting for the connection ID to be written in.
3: Connection completed
4: Time-out

2nd digit: Status of Polled ID instance


0: No instance exists in the network or one is now
being prepared.
1: Waiting to be connected to the master while on-
line.
2: Waiting for the connection ID to be written in.
3: Connection completed
4: Time-out

U-70 Frequency reference r/ The frequency reference from the DeviceNet can be
from DeviceNet min monitored.

* 1. The status indicator is not turned ON.


* 2. Refer to the next page for input/output terminal status.
* 3. The display range is from −99.9 to 99.99 kW.
When regenerating, the output power will be displayed in units of
0.01 kW when −9.99 kW or less and in units of 0.1 kW when more
than −9.99 kW.
In vector control mode, “---” will be displayed.
* 4. Displayed in units of 0.1% when less than 100% and in units of 1% when
100% or more. The display range is from −999% to 999%.
* 5. The unit is determined by the value set for constant n035. For details,
refer to page 196.

50
5. Operating the Inverter

† Input/Output Terminal Status


Input terminal status

1: Terminal S1 is closed.
1: Terminal S2 is closed.
1: Terminal S3 is closed. (see note 1.)
1: Terminal S4 is closed. (see note 1.)
1: Terminal S5 is closed. (see note 2.)
1: Terminal S6 is closed. (see note 2.)
1: Terminal S7 is closed. (see note 2.)

Note: 1. “1” is also displayed if command input from DeviceNet communica-


tions or the external control terminal is closed.
2. “1” is displayed if command input from DeviceNet communications
is closed. There are no external terminals.
Output terminal status

1: Terminal MA is closed. (see note.)


1: Terminal P1-PC is closed.
1: Terminal P2-PC is closed.

Note: This can only be used from DeviceNet communications. There is no


external output terminal.

51
Fault History Display Method
When U-09 is selected, a four-digit box is displayed. The three digits
from the right show the fault description, and the digit on the left shows
the order of fault (from one to four). Number 1 represents the most
recent fault, and numbers 2, 3, 4 represent the other faults, in ascending
order of fault occurrence.
Example:
4-digit number
: Order of fault (1 to 4)
: Fault description
"---" is displayed if there is no fault.
(Refer to Chapter 9. Fault Diagnosis for details.)
Switching Fault History Records
The fault that is displayed can be changed using the or key.
Clearing the Fault History
Set constant n001 to 6 to clear the fault history. The display will return
to n001 after 6 is set.
Note: Initializing the constants (n001=12, 13) also clears the fault history.
Setting and Referencing Constants
The following diagram shows how to select and change constants.

REMOTE/LOCAL
selection

• Setting n003 (RUN command selection)

Constant
No./
data Set to 1
n003 Factory setting: 0
Operation Operator reference Control circuit
reference terminal reference
selection (flashing at changing)

Return to Data set


constant No.
display

52
5. Operating the Inverter

„ Simple Data Setting


Digital setting (refer to 5. Operating the Inverter) and potentiometer
setting are both possible for simple acceleration/deceleration operation
of the Varispeed V7.
DeviceNet communications are set to enabled at the factory (n004=9).
Simple Operation from the Digital Operator Using Frequency
Reference
Following is an example in which forward and reverse run is performed
with a standard motor with frequency set to 1,800 r/min, acceleration
time set to 15 s, and deceleration time set to 5 s. (Refer to page 127 for
details on parameter settings.)

53
Operation Steps Opera- Function Status Indicators
tor Dis- Indicators
play

1. Turn ON the power supply. 0

2. Set constant n004 to 1. 1


(Enables the potentiometer and
RUN/STOP commands from
the Digital Operator.)
15.0
5.0
3. Set the following constants.
n019: 15.0 (Acceleration Time)
n020: 5.0 (Deceleration Time) (For-
ward)
Or
4. Select forward or reverse run
by pressing the or (Rever
key. se)

Examine the application. 1800


NOTE (Never select REV when
reverse run is prohibited.)
0
5. Set the reference by pressing 1800
the or key. 1800
0
6. Press .

7. Press to stop.

Status indicators :ON :Flashing (long flashing) :Flashing :OFF

54
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

6. Operating with DeviceNet


Communications
Varispeed V7 Inverters can be connected to a DeviceNet network to com-
municate with a DeviceNet master. The DeviceNet master can be used for
various operations, such as sending RUN/STOP commands, monitoring run
status, and setting/referencing of constants.

„ Specifications
Item Specifications
DeviceNet Conform to release 2.0.
Specifications
Device Protocol AC Drive
DeviceType = 02
Baud Rate 125, 250, or 500 kbps
Settings
Supported Group 2 Only server.
Messages UCMM not supported.
Explicit messages or I/O poll messages
I/O Message Seven kinds of I/O instances are supported:
Communications 1. Basic I/O instances (4 input bytes, 4 out-
put bytes)
2. Extended I/O instances (4 input bytes,
4 output bytes)
3. MEMOBUS I/O instances (5 input bytes,
5 output bytes)
4. V7 standard control I/O instances (8 input
bytes, 8 output bytes)
5. Acceleration/Deceleration time control I/O
instances (8 input bytes, 8 output bytes)
6. Extended MEMOBUS I/O instances
(8 input bytes, 8 output bytes)
7. General-purpose DI/DO control I/O
instances (8 input bytes, 8 output bytes)

55
Item Specifications
Explicit Message Up to 32 bytes of data can be transferred in
Communications conformance with the DeviceNet AC/DC
drive profile.
Communications 11 to 25 VDC (20 mA max.)
Power Supply

„ Component Names and Settings


† Rotary Switches
The rotary switches are used to set the DeviceNet baud rate and MAC
ID (node address). Always turn OFF the Inverter’s input power supply
before changing the rotary switch settings. The settings will be enabled
the next time the power is turned ON.
RATE
1 2 34 Baud rate
S1 0 5
9 8 76 setting

2
1 34 1 2 34
S3 0 5 0 5 S4
9 8 76 9 8 76

MSB LSB
ADDRESS

MAC ID Setting MAC ID Setting


10 s digit (MSB) 1 s digit (LSB)

Baud Rate Setting Switch (S1)

Setting 0 1 2 3 to 9
Baud Rate 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps Use setting in
constant n152.
MAC ID Setting Switches (S3 and S4)
The Inverter’s MAC ID is set on the MSB (S3) and LSB (S4) rotary
switches.
MAC ID = (MSB setting × 10) + (LSB setting)
The MAC ID setting range is 0 to 63. If a value between 64 and 99 is
set, the MAC ID setting in constant n150 will be used.

56
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

„ Description of the DeviceNet Functions


DeviceNet-compatible Inverters support the AC Drive Profile defined
in DeviceNet specifications. No special settings are needed to operate,
adjust, and monitor the Inverters from any DeviceNet master.
DeviceNet-compatible Inverters operate as Group 2 Only servers
(DeviceNet slaves) in the DeviceNet network. Two kinds of communi-
cations are possible with the master: I/O messages and explicit mes-
sages.
† Initial Settings
Always set the following Inverter constants before using DeviceNet
communications.

Constant Name Description


No.
n003 RUN 0: Enables the Digital Operator’s RUN
Command and STOP Keys.
Selection 1: Enables the run/stop control circuit
terminals.
3: Enables DeviceNet
communications.
Set this constant to 3 when sending
RUN/STOP commands through De-
viceNet communications.

57
Constant Name Description
No.
n004 Frequency 0: Enables the Digital Operator’s
Reference potentiometer setting.
Selection 1: Enables Frequency Reference 1
(constant n024).
7: Enables a voltage reference (0 to
10 V) at the Digital Operator’s cir-
cuit terminal.
8: Enables a current reference (4 to
20 mA) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
9: Enables DeviceNet
communications.
Set this constant to 9 when setting the
frequency through DeviceNet commu-
nications.
n035 Selecting Always set the number of motor poles
Setting/Dis- (2 to 39).
play Units of In DeviceNet standards, the motor
Frequency speed is expressed in units of r/min.
Reference The Inverter uses this constant setting
to convert the frequency to r/min.

58
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

† I/O Message Communications


The DeviceNet-compatible Inverters use poll command/response mes-
sages for I/O message communications. Select one of the seven sup-
ported I/O instances and transfer I/O data with the master. I/O messages
are always transferred between the Inverter and master at the fixed com-
munications period whether or not there have been changes to the I/O
data.
Basic I/O Instances
This is a standard I/O instance type defined in DeviceNet’s AC Drive
Profile. Four bytes are used for input data and four bytes are used for
output data.

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 20 (14 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- --- --- --- --- Fault --- Run
Reset Fwd
1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)
3 Speed Reference (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Run Fwd Runs the Inverter forward.
bit 0 0: Stop.
1: Run forward.
Byte 0, Fault Reset Resets the Inverter from fault status.
bit 2 0: ---
1: Reset fault.

59
Data Name Contents
Bytes Speed Sets the Inverter’s speed reference.
2 and 3 Reference Speed reference data:
*3 Frequency reference (r/min) × 2SS
(SS: Speed scale*1)
Setting range: 0 to FFFF Hex*2
For example, when setting a reference
of 1,800 r/min with a speed scale of 0:
Speed reference data = 1,800 × 20 =
1,800 = 0708 Hex
* 1. The speed scale can be set with AC/DC Drive object attribute 16 through
explicit message communications.
* 2. The speed reference setting cannot exceed the Inverter’s Maximum Out-
put Frequency Setting in constant n011.
* 3. When using the speed reference, always set the Number of Motor Poles (2
to 39) in Inverter constant n035 (Selecting Setting/Display Units of Fre-
quency Reference).

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 70 (46 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- --- --- --- --- Run- --- Faulted
ning 1
(Fwd)
1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)
3 Speed Actual (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Faulted Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 0 fault.
0: Normal
1: Fault detected.

60
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Running 1 Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 2 (Fwd) 0: Stopped, operating in reverse, or
applying DC injection braking
(Reverse RUN command ON).
1: Operating forward or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand OFF).
Bytes Speed Indicates the Inverter’s speed.
2 and 3 Actual Monitored speed data:
Monitored frequency (r/min) × 2SS
(SS: Speed scale*1)
For example, when the monitored speed
data is 03E8 Hex and the speed scale is
0:
Monitored frequency = 03E8 Hex/ 20 =
1,000/ 20 = 1,000 r/min.
* 1. The speed scale can be set with AC/DC Drive object attribute 16 through
explicit message communications.
* 2. When using the Speed Actual monitor, always set the Number of Motor
Poles (2 to 39) in Inverter constant n035 (Selecting Setting/Display Units
of Frequency Reference).
Extended I/O Instance (Factory Setting)
This is a standard I/O instance type defined in DeviceNet’s AC Drive
Profile and it is the initial factory setting for I/O instances. Four bytes
are used for input data and four bytes are used for output data.

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 21 (15 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- Net Net --- --- Fault Run Run
Ref Ctrl Reset Rev Fwd
1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)
3 Speed Reference (High Byte)

61
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Run Fwd Runs the Inverter forward.
bit 0 0: Stop.
1: Run forward.
Byte 0, Run Rev Runs the Inverter in reverse.
bit 1 0: Stop.
1: Run in reverse.
Byte 0, Fault Reset Resets the Inverter from fault status.
bit 2 0: ---
1: Reset fault.
Byte 0, NetCtrl Sets the RUN command right.
bit 5 0: Use the RUN Command Input Method
set in constant n003 (RUN Command
Selection).
1: Enables the RUN command from
DeviceNet (byte 0, bits 0 and 1).
Byte 0, NetRef Sets the Frequency Reference right.
bit 6 0: Use the Frequency Reference Input
Method set in constant n004 (Fre-
quency Reference Selection).
1: Enables the Frequency Reference
from DeviceNet (bytes 2 and 3).
Bytes Speed Sets the Inverter’s speed reference.
2 and 3 Reference The speed reference is exactly the same
as it is in a Basic I/O Instances.

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 71 (47 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 At Ref- Ref Ctrl Ready Run- Run- Warn- Fault-
erence From From ning 2 ning 1 ing ed
Net Net (Rev) (Fwd)

1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---


2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)

62
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


3 Speed Actual (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Faulted Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 0 fault.
0: Normal
1: Fault detected.
Byte 0, Warning Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 1 warning.
0: Normal
1: Warning detected.
Byte 0, Running 1 Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 2 (Fwd) 0: Stopped, operating in reverse, or
applying DC injection braking
(Reverse RUN command ON).
1: Operating forward or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand OFF).
Byte 0, Running 2 Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 3 (Rev) 0: Stopped, operating forward, or apply-
ing DC injection braking (Reverse
RUN command OFF).
1: Operating in reverse or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand ON).
Byte 0, Ready Indicates the Inverter’s preparation sta-
bit 4 tus.
0: Fault detected or initializing.
1: Preparations for operation completed.

63
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Ctrl From Indicates which RUN command input
bit 5 Net has been selected in the Inverter.
0: A RUN command input other than
DeviceNet is enabled.
1: The RUN command input from
DeviceNet is enabled.
Byte 0, Ref From Indicates which Frequency Reference
bit 6 Net input has been selected in the Inverter.
0: A Frequency Reference input other
than DeviceNet is enabled.
1: The Frequency Reference input from
DeviceNet is enabled.
Byte 0, At Refer- Indicates that the Inverter’s frequency
bit 7 ence match was detected.
0: Stopped, accelerating, or decelerat-
ing.
1: Frequency matches.
Bytes Speed Indicates the Inverter’s speed.
2 and 3 Actual The speed data is exactly the same as it
is in the Basic I/O Instances.
MEMOBUS I/O Instances
All of the Inverter’s constants can be referenced and set with a
MEMOBUS I/O instance.
MEMOBUS I/O instances can be used with Yaskawa Inverters only.
They cannot be used with other companies’ DeviceNet-compatible
Inverters.
Five bytes are used for input data and five bytes are used for output
data.
Always execute the ENTER command when changing constants. See
ENTER Command (Write-only Register) on page 126 for details.

64
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 100 (64 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Function Code
1 Register Number (High Byte)
2 Register Number (Low Byte)
3 Register Data (High Byte)
4 Register Data (Low Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0 Function Set the MEMOBUS (command mes-
Code sage) function code.
03 Hex: Read
10 Hex: Write
00 Hex: Do not execute.
Bytes Register Set the Inverter’s MEMOBUS register
1 and 2 Number number.
Bytes Register Set the write data when executing a ME-
3 and 4 Data MOBUS WRITE command.

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 150 (96 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Function Code
1 Register Number (High Byte)
2 Register Number (Low Byte)
3 Register Data (High Byte)
4 Register Data (Low Byte)

65
Data Name Contents
Byte 0 Function Indicates the MEMOBUS (response
Code message) function code.
00 Hex: Do not execute.
03 Hex: Normal read
10 Hex: Normal write
83 Hex: Read error
90 Hex: Write error
Bytes Register Indicates the MEMOBUS register num-
1 and 2 Number ber in the executed process. These
bytes will contain the MEMOBUS error
code if a read or write error occurred.
Bytes Register Indicates the read data when executing
3 and 4 Data a MEMOBUS READ command.
Shows “00, 00” if an attempt is made to
write the same data to the same ad-
dress; the WRITE command will not be
executed.
V7 Standard Control I/O Instances
V7 Standard control I/O instances are for DeviceNet-compatible Invert-
ers only. All of the Inverter’s I/O functions can be used in addition to
the functions supported by the Extended I/O Instances.
V7 Standard control I/O instances can be used with Yaskawa Inverters
only. They cannot be used with other companies’ DeviceNet-compati-
ble Inverters.
Eight bytes are used for input data and eight bytes are used for output
data.

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 101 (65 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Run Run
nal S7* nal S6* nal S5* nal S4 nal S3 Rev Fwd

1 Termi- Termi- Termi- --- --- --- Fault Exter-


nal P2 nal P1 nal Reset nal
MA* Fault

2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)

66
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


3 Speed Reference (High Byte)
4 ---
5 ---
6 ---
7 ---

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Run Fwd Runs the Inverter forward.
bit 0 0: Stop.
1: Run forward.
Byte 0, Run Rev Runs the Inverter in reverse.
bit 1 0: Stop.
1: Run in reverse.
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 2 S3 multi-function input terminal S3. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S3 with Inverter constant n052.
0: Terminal S3 function OFF
1: Terminal S3 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 3 S4 multi-function input terminal S4. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S4 with Inverter constant n053.
0: Terminal S4 function OFF
1: Terminal S4 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 4 S5* stant n054 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 5.)
0: Terminal S5 function OFF
1: Terminal S5 function ON

67
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 5 S6* stant n055 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 6.)
0: Terminal S6 function OFF
1: Terminal S6 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 6 S7* stant n056 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 7.)
0: Terminal S7 function OFF
1: Terminal S7 function ON
* These terminals can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There
are no corresponding external input terminals or output terminals.

Data Name Contents


Byte 1, External External fault (EF0) input from communi-
bit 0 Fault cations.
0: ---
1: External fault (EF0)
Byte 1, Fault Reset Resets the Inverter from fault status.
bit 1 0: ---
1: Reset fault.
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 5 MA* output terminal MA. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n057
is set to 18.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 6 P1 output terminal P1. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n058
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON

68
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 7 P2 output terminal P2. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n059
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Speed Sets the Inverter’s speed reference.
2 and 3 Reference The units depend on the setting in Invert-
er constant n035. The units are not af-
fected by the speed scale (SS) setting.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 151 (97 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Fault- Warn- Ready At Ref- Reset Rev ZSP Run-
ed ing erence Run- ning
ning

1 --- --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Local/ UV OPE


nal P2 nal P1 nal Re-
MA* mote

2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)


3 Speed Actual (High Byte)
4 ---
5 ---
6 Output Current (Low Byte)
7 Output Current (High Byte)

69
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Running Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 0 0: Stopped.
1: Operating forward, operating in
reverse, or applying DC injection
braking.
Byte 0, ZSP Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 1 0: Operating forward or in reverse.
1: Stopped or applying DC injection
braking.
Byte 0, Rev Run- Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 2 ning 0: Operating forward, stopped (Reverse
RUN command OFF), or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand OFF).
1: Operating in reverse, stopped
(Reverse RUN command ON), or
applying DC injection braking
(Reverse RUN command ON).
Byte 0, Reset Indicates the input status of the
bit 3 Inverter’s RESET signal.
0: ---
1: RESET signal being input.
Byte 0, At Refer- Indicates that the Inverter’s frequency
bit 4 ence match was detected.
0: Stopped, accelerating, or decelerat-
ing.
1: Frequency matches.
Byte 0, Ready Indicates the Inverter’s preparation sta-
bit 5 tus.
0: Fault detected or initializing.
1: Preparations for operation completed.

70
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Warning Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 6 warning.
0: Normal
1: Warning detected.
Byte 0, Faulted Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 7 fault.
0: Normal
1: Fault detected.
Byte 1, OPE Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 0 MEMOBUS constant setting error
(OPE).
0: Normal
1: OPE (OP1 to OP5) detected.
Byte 1, UV Indicates that the Inverter detected an
bit 1 undervoltage error.
0: Normal
1: UV detected.
Byte 1, Local/Re- Indicates which RUN command input
bit 2 mote has been selected in the Inverter.
0: A RUN command input other than
DeviceNet is enabled.
1: The RUN command input from
DeviceNet is enabled.
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 3 MA* multi-function output terminal MA.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 4 P1 multi-function output terminal P1.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON

71
Data Name Contents
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 5 P2 multi-function output terminal P2.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Speed Ac- Indicates the Inverter’s speed.
2 and 3 tual The units depend on the setting in Invert-
er constant n035. The units are not af-
fected by the speed scale (SS) setting.
Bytes Output Indicates the Inverter’s output current.
6 and 7 Current The units are fixed at 0.1 A. The units
are not affected by the current scale
(CS) setting.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control I/O Instances
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control I/O Instances are for
DeviceNet-compatible Inverters only. They support the functions of the
V7 standard control I/O instances and also allow the acceleration/decel-
eration time to be set and the motor speed (estimated value) to be moni-
tored. Eight bytes are used for input data and eight bytes are used for
output data.

72
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 102 (66 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Run Run
nal S7* nal S6* nal S5* nal S4 nal S3 Rev Fwd

1 Termi- Termi- Termi- --- --- --- Fault Exter-


nal P2 nal P1 nal Reset nal
MA* Fault

2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)


3 Speed Reference (High Byte)
4 Acceleration Time 1 (Low Byte)
5 Acceleration Time 1 (High Byte)
6 Deceleration Time 1 (Low Byte)
7 Deceleration Time 1 (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Run Fwd Runs the Inverter forward.
bit 0 0: Stop.
1: Run forward.
Byte 0, Run Rev Runs the Inverter in reverse.
bit 1 0: Stop.
1: Run in reverse.
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 2 S3 multi-function input terminal S3. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S3 with Inverter constant n052.
0: Terminal S3 function OFF
1: Terminal S3 function ON

73
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 3 S4 multi-function input terminal S4. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S4 with Inverter constant n053.
0: Terminal S4 function OFF
1: Terminal S4 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 4 S5* stant n054 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 5.)
0: Terminal S5 function OFF
1: Terminal S5 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 5 S6* stant n055 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 6.)
0: Terminal S6 function OFF
1: Terminal S6 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 6 S7* stant n056 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 7.)
0: Terminal S7 function OFF
1: Terminal S7 function ON
Byte 1, External External fault (EF0) input from communi-
bit 0 Fault cations.
0: ---
1: External fault (EF0)
Byte 1, Fault Reset Resets the Inverter from fault status.
bit 1 0: ---
1: Reset fault.

74
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 5 MA* output terminal MA. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n057
is set to 18.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 6 P1 output terminal P1. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n058
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 7 P2 output terminal P2. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n059
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Frequency Sets the Inverter’s speed reference.
2 and 3 Reference This setting is the same as the speed
reference in the V7 standard control I/O
instance. The units depend on the set-
ting in Inverter constant n035.
Bytes Accelera- Sets the Inverter’s acceleration time.
4 and 5 tion Time 1 The units depend on the setting in
Inverter constant n018. (The factory set-
ting is for units of 0.1 s.) The value set
here is recorded in EEPROM. The units
are not affected by the time scale (TS)
setting.

75
Data Name Contents
Bytes Decelera- Sets the Inverter’s deceleration time.
6 and 7 tion Time 1 The units depend on the setting in
Inverter constant n018. (The factory set-
ting is for units of 0.1 s.) The value set
here is recorded in EEPROM. The units
are not affected by the time scale (TS)
setting.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 152 (98 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Fault- Warn- Ready At Ref- Reset Rev ZSP Run-
ed ing erence Run- ning
ning

1 --- --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Local/ UV OPE


nal P2 nal P1 nal Re-
MA* mote

2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)


3 Speed Actual (High Byte)
4 Speed Reference (Low Byte)
5 Speed Reference (High Byte)
6 Output Current (Low Byte)
7 Output Current (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Running Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 0 0: Stopped.
1: Operating forward, operating in
reverse, or applying DC injection
braking.

76
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, ZSP Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 1 0: Operating forward or in reverse.
1: Stopped or applying DC injection
braking.
Byte 0, Rev Run- Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 2 ning 0: Operating forward, stopped (Reverse
RUN command OFF), or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand OFF).
1: Operating in reverse, stopped
(Reverse RUN command ON), or
applying DC injection braking
(Reverse RUN command ON).
Byte 0, Reset Indicates the input status of the
bit 3 Inverter’s RESET signal.
0: ---
1: RESET signal being input.
Byte 0, At Refer- Indicates that the Inverter’s frequency
bit 4 ence match was detected.
0: Stopped, accelerating, or decelerat-
ing.
1: Frequency matches.
Byte 0, Ready Indicates the Inverter’s preparation sta-
bit 5 tus.
0: Fault detected or initializing.
1: Preparations for operation completed.
Byte 0, Warning Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 6 warning.
0: Normal
1: Warning detected.

77
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Faulted Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 7 fault.
0: Normal
1: Fault detected.
Byte 1, OPE Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 0 MEMOBUS constant setting error
(OPE).
0: Normal
1: OPE (OP1 to OP5) detected.
Byte 1, UV Indicates that the Inverter detected an
bit 1 undervoltage error.
0: Normal
1: UV detected.
Byte 1, Local/Re- Indicates which RUN command input
bit 2 mote has been selected in the Inverter.
0: A RUN command input other than
DeviceNet is enabled.
1: The RUN command input from
DeviceNet is enabled.
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 3 MA* multi-function output terminal MA.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 4 P1 multi-function output terminal P1.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 5 P2 multi-function output terminal P2.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON

78
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Bytes Speed Ac- Indicates the Inverter’s speed.
2 and 3 tual The units depend on the setting in
Inverter constant n035. The units are not
affected by the speed scale (SS) setting.
Bytes Speed Indicates the Inverter’s speed reference.
4 and 5 Reference The units depend on the setting in
Inverter constant n035. The units are not
affected by the speed scale (SS) setting.
Bytes Output Indicates the Inverter’s output current.
6 and 7 Current The units are fixed at 0.1 A. The units
are not affected by the current scale
(CS) setting.
* These terminals can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There
are no corresponding external input or output terminals.
Extended MEMOBUS I/O Instances
Extended MEMOBUS I/O Instances are for DeviceNet-compatible
Inverters only.
Extended MEMOBUS I/O Instances can be used with Yaskawa Invert-
ers only. They cannot be used with other companies’ DeviceNet-com-
patible Inverters.
Eight bytes are used for input data and eight bytes are used for output
data.
Always execute the ENTER command when changing constants. See
ENTER Command (Write-only Register) on page 126 for details.

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 105 (69 Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Run Run
nal S7* nal S6* nal S5* nal S4 nal S3 Rev Fwd

1 Termi- Termi- Termi- --- Fnc. Fnc. Fault Exter-


nal P2 nal P1 nal Code 2 Code 1 Reset nal
MA* Fault

2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)


3 Speed Reference (High Byte)

79
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
4 Register Number (Low Byte)
5 Register Number (High Byte)
6 Register Data (Low Byte)
7 Register Data (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Run Fwd Runs the Inverter forward.
bit 0 0: Stop.
1: Run forward.
Byte 0, Run Rev Runs the Inverter in reverse.
bit 1 0: Stop.
1: Run in reverse.
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 2 S3 multi-function input terminal S3. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S3 with Inverter constant n052.
0: Terminal S3 function OFF
1: Terminal S3 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 3 S4 multi-function input terminal S4. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S4 with Inverter constant n053.
0: Terminal S4 function OFF
1: Terminal S4 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 4 S5* stant n054 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 5.)
0: Terminal S5 function OFF
1: Terminal S5 function ON

80
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 5 S6* stant n055 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 6.)
0: Terminal S6 function OFF
1: Terminal S6 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 6 S7* stant n056 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 7.)
0: Terminal S7 function OFF
1: Terminal S7 function ON
* These terminals can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There
are no corresponding external input terminals or output terminals.

Data Name Contents


Byte 1, External External fault (EF0) input from communi-
bit 0 Fault cations.
0: ---
1: External fault (EF0)
Byte 1, Fault Reset Resets the Inverter from fault status.
bit 1 0: ---
1: Reset fault.
Byte 1, Fnc. Code See the table MEMOBUS Function
bit 2 1 Codes on page 82 for details.
Byte 1, Fnc. Code
bit 3 2
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 5 MA* output terminal MA. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n057
is set to 18.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON

81
Data Name Contents
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 6 P1 output terminal P1. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n058
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 7 P2 output terminal P2. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n059
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Speed Sets the Inverter’s speed reference.
2 and 3 Reference The units depend on the setting in Invert-
er constant n035. The units are not af-
fected by the speed scale (SS) setting.
Bytes Register Set the Inverter’s MEMOBUS register
4 and 5 Number number.
Bytes Register Set the write data when executing a ME-
6 and 7 Data MOBUS WRITE command.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.
MEMOBUS Function Codes

Status of Func- Status of Func- Function


tion Code 1 tion Code 2
(Byte 1, bit 1) (Byte 1, bit 2)
Fnc. Code 1 = 0 Fnc. Code 2 = 0 Nothing will be executed.
Fnc. Code 1 = 0 Fnc. Code 2 = 1 The data will be read from
the register specified in
bytes 4 and 5.

82
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Status of Func- Status of Func- Function


tion Code 1 tion Code 2
(Byte 1, bit 1) (Byte 1, bit 2)
Fnc. Code 1 = 1 Fnc. Code 2 = 0 The data specified in
bytes 6 and 7 will be writ-
ten to the register speci-
fied in bytes 4 and 5.
Fnc. Code 1 = 1 Fnc. Code 2 = 1 Nothing will be executed.

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 155 (9B Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Fault- Warn- Ready At Ref- Reset Rev ZSP Run-
ed ing erence Run- ning
ning

1 Termi- Termi- Termi- Local/ Fnc. Fnc. UV OPE


nal P2 nal P1 nal Re- Code 2 Code 1
MA* mote

2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)


3 Speed Actual (High Byte)
4 Register Number (Low Byte)
5 Register Number (High Byte)
6 Register Data (Low Byte)
7 Register Data (High Byte)

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Running Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 0 0: Stopped.
1: Operating forward, operating in
reverse, or applying DC injection
braking.

83
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, ZSP Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 1 0: Operating forward or in reverse.
1: Stopped or applying DC injection
braking.
Byte 0, Rev Run- Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 2 ning 0: Operating forward, stopped (Reverse
RUN command OFF), or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand OFF).
1: Operating in reverse, stopped
(Reverse RUN command ON), or
applying DC injection braking
(Reverse RUN command ON).
Byte 0, Reset Indicates the input status of the
bit 3 Inverter’s RESET signal.
0: ---
1: RESET signal being input.
Byte 0, At Refer- Indicates that the Inverter’s frequency
bit 4 ence match was detected.
0: Stopped, accelerating, or decelerat-
ing.
1: Frequency matches.
Byte 0, Ready Indicates the Inverter’s preparation sta-
bit 5 tus.
0: Fault detected or initializing.
1: Preparations for operation completed.
Byte 0, Warning Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 6 warning.
0: Normal
1: Warning detected.

84
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Faulted Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 7 fault.
0: Normal
1: Fault detected.
Byte 1, OPE Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 0 MEMOBUS constant setting error
(OPE).
0: Normal
1: OPE (OP1 to OP5) detected.
Byte 1, UV Indicates that the Inverter detected an
bit 1 undervoltage error.
0: Normal
1: UV detected.
Byte 1, Fnc. State See the table MEMOBUS Function Sta-
bit 2 1 tus on page 87 for details.
Byte 1, Fnc. State
bit 3 2
Byte 1, Local/Re- Indicates which RUN command input
bit 4 mote has been selected in the Inverter.
0: A RUN command input other than
DeviceNet is enabled.
1: The RUN command input from
DeviceNet is enabled.
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 5 MA* multi-function output terminal MA.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 6 P1 multi-function output terminal P1.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON

85
Data Name Contents
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 7 P2 multi-function output terminal P2.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Speed Ac- Indicates the Inverter’s speed.
2 and 3 tual The units depend on the setting in Invert-
er constant n035. The units are not af-
fected by the speed scale (SS) setting.
Bytes Register Indicates the MEMOBUS register num-
4 and 5 Number ber in the executed process. These
bytes will contain the MEMOBUS error
code if a read or write error occurred.
Bytes Register Indicates the read data when executing
6 and 7 Data a MEMOBUS READ command.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.

86
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

MEMOBUS Function Status

Status of Func- Status of Func- Operational Status


tion State 1 tion State 2
(Byte 1, bit 1) (Byte 1, bit 2)
Fnc. State 1 = 0 Fnc. State 2 = 0 Not executed yet.
Fnc. State 1 = 0 Fnc. State 2 = 1 A MEMOBUS command
is being executed.
Fnc. State 1 = 1 Fnc. State 2 = 0 A MEMOBUS command
execution error occurred.
Fnc. State 1 = 1 Fnc. State 2 = 1 MEMOBUS command ex-
ecution was completed.

General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instances


General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instances are for DeviceNet-com-
patible Inverters only.
General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instances can be used for general-
purpose I/O through the Inverter’s control circuit terminals (S1 to S4,
P1, and P2) as well as the functions supported by the standard control I/
O instance.
Always execute the ENTER command when changing constants. See
ENTER Command (Write-only Register) on page 126 for details.
General-purpose DI/DO Control I/O Instances can be used with
Yaskawa Inverters only. They cannot be used with other companies’
DeviceNet-compatible Inverters.
Eight bytes are used for input data and eight bytes are used for output
data.

• Input (Master → Inverter) Instance 106 (6A Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi- Run Run
nal S7* nal S6* nal S5* nal S4 nal S3 Rev Fwd

1 Termi- Termi- Termi- --- --- --- Fault Exter-


nal P2 nal P1 nal Reset nal
MA* Fault

2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)

87
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
3 Speed Reference (High Byte)
4 Not used.
5 Not used.
6 Not used.
7 Not used.

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Run Fwd Runs the Inverter forward.
bit 0 0: Stop.
1: Run forward.
Byte 0, Run Rev Runs the Inverter in reverse.
bit 1 0: Stop.
1: Run in reverse.
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 2 S3 multi-function input terminal S3. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S3 with Inverter constant n052.
0: Terminal S3 function OFF
1: Terminal S3 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for the Inverter’s
bit 3 S4 multi-function input terminal S4. Set the
function of multi-function input terminal
S4 with Inverter constant n053.
0: Terminal S4 function OFF
1: Terminal S4 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 4 S5* stant n054 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 5.)
0: Terminal S5 function OFF
1: Terminal S5 function ON

88
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 5 S6* stant n055 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 6.)
0: Terminal S6 function OFF
1: Terminal S6 function ON
Byte 0, Terminal Inputs the function set for Inverter con-
bit 6 S7* stant n056 (Multi-function Input Selec-
tion 7.)
0: Terminal S7 function OFF
1: Terminal S7 function ON
Byte 1, External External fault (EF0) input from communi-
bit 0 Fault cations.
0: ---
1: External fault (EF0)
Byte 1, Fault Reset Resets the Inverter from fault status.
bit 1 0: ---
1: Reset fault.
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 5 MA* output terminal MA. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n057
is set to 18.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 6 P1 output terminal P1. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n058
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON

89
Data Name Contents
Byte 1, Terminal Operates the Inverter’s multi-function
bit 7 P2 output terminal P2. This function is en-
abled only when Inverter constant n059
is set to 18.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Speed Indicates the Inverter’s speed reference.
2 and 3 Reference The units depend on the setting in
Inverter constant n035.
The units are not affected by the speed
scale (SS) setting.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.

• Output (Inverter → Master) Instance 156 (9C Hex)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Fault- Warn- Ready At Ref- Reset Rev ZSP Run-
ed ing erence Run- ning
ning

1 Termi- Termi- Termi- --- Termi- Termi- Termi- Termi-


nal P2 nal P1 nal nal S4 nal S3 nal S2 nal S1
MA*

2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)


3 Speed Actual (High Byte)
4 ---
5 ---
6 Output Current Monitor (Low Byte)
7 Output Current Monitor (High Byte)

90
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 0, Running Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 0 0: Stopped.
1: Operating forward, operating in
reverse, or applying DC injection
braking.
Byte 0, ZSP Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 1 0: Operating forward or in reverse.
1: Stopped or applying DC injection
braking.
Byte 0, Rev Run- Indicates the Inverter’s operating status.
bit 2 ning 0: Operating forward, stopped (Reverse
RUN command OFF), or applying DC
injection braking (Reverse RUN com-
mand OFF).
1: Operating in reverse, stopped
(Reverse RUN command ON), or
applying DC injection braking
(Reverse RUN command ON).
Byte 0, Reset Indicates the input status of the
bit 3 Inverter’s RESET signal.
0: ---
1: RESET signal being input.
Byte 0, At Refer- Indicates that the Inverter’s frequency
bit 4 ence match was detected.
0: Stopped, accelerating, or decelerat-
ing.
1: Frequency matches.
Byte 0, Ready Indicates the Inverter’s preparation sta-
bit 5 tus.
0: Fault detected or initializing.
1: Preparations for operation completed.

91
Data Name Contents
Byte 0, Warning Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 6 warning.
0: Normal
1: Warning detected.
Byte 0, Faulted Indicates that the Inverter detected a
bit 7 fault.
0: Normal
1: Fault detected.
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the input status of Inverter
bit 0 S1 multi-function input terminal S1. When
using this terminal as a general-purpose
DI terminal, always set Inverter constant
n050 to 28.
0: Terminal S1 OFF
1: Terminal S1 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the input status of Inverter
bit 1 S2 multi-function input terminal S2. When
using this terminal as a general-purpose
DI terminal, always set Inverter constant
n051 to 28.
0: Terminal S2 OFF
1: Terminal S2 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the input status of Inverter
bit 2 S3 multi-function input terminal S3. When
using this terminal as a general-purpose
DI terminal, always set Inverter constant
n052 to 28.
0: Terminal S3 OFF
1: Terminal S3 ON

92
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Data Name Contents


Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the input status of Inverter
bit 3 S4 multi-function input terminal S4. When
using this terminal as a general-purpose
DI terminal, always set Inverter constant
n053 to 28.
0: Terminal S4 OFF
1: Terminal S4 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 5 MA* multi-function output terminal MA.
0: Terminal MA OFF
1: Terminal MA ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 6 P1 multi-function output terminal P1.
0: Terminal P1 OFF
1: Terminal P1 ON
Byte 1, Terminal Indicates the output status of Inverter
bit 7 P2 multi-function output terminal P2.
0: Terminal P2 OFF
1: Terminal P2 ON
Bytes Speed Indicates the Inverter’s speed.
2 and 3 Actual The units depend on the setting in
Inverter constant n035.
The units are not affected by the speed
scale (SS) setting.
Bytes Output Indicates the Inverter’s output current.
6 and 7 Current The units are fixed at 0.1 A. The units
Monitor are not affected by the current scale
(CS) setting.
* Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There is
no corresponding external output terminal.

93
† Explicit Message Communications
The DeviceNet-compatible Inverters can transfer explicit messages
(defined in DeviceNet specifications) to and from a DeviceNet master.
Various kinds of data can be set and referenced from the master, ranging
from DeviceNet-related settings to the Inverter’s control data. Unlike I/
O message communications, which are performed at regular intervals,
the explicit messages can be sent from the master at any time and corre-
sponding response messages will be returned.
• Format of Explicit Messages
Header MAC ID Service Class Instance Attribute Data Footer
Code

Item Description
Header This value is set automatically, so there is no need
to check it.
MAC ID Contains the MAC ID of the master or slave that is
the other node involved in the data transfer.
Service In a request message, the service code specifies
Code the requested operation such as reading or writing
data.
In a normal response, bit 15 (the most significant
bit) of the request service code will be turned ON
in the response. If an error occurred, the code 94
will be returned.
Examples:
• 0E: Read request
• 8E: Normal read response
• 10: Write request
• 90: Normal write response
• 94: Error response
Class Each DeviceNet function is divided into these 3
codes. When specifying data, specify it with these
Instance 3 codes.
Attribute
Data Request: Contains the write data.
Response: Contains the read data or error code.

94
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Item Description
Footer This value is set automatically, so there is no need
to check it.
Identity Object (Class 01 Hex)
The Identity object stores the DeviceNet product information. All of the
attributes are read-only.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.
05 Reset Resets (initializes) the Inverter's
communications status.

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the Iden- --- 0001 OK --- Word


Soft- tity object's soft-
ware ware revision.
Revision

01 01 Vendor Indicates the man- --- 002C OK --- Word


ID ufacturer's code.
• 44 (2C Hex):
Yaskawa Elec-
tric

02 Device Indicates the De- --- 0002 OK --- Word


Type viceNet device
profile. This prod-
uct implements
the AC Drive pro-
file.
• 2: AC Drive

03 Product Indicates the prod- --- Depends OK --- Word


Code uct code as- on prod-
signed by the uct.
manufacturer.
(See note 1.)

04 Revision Indicates the --- 01,01 OK --- Byte x


Inverter's commu- 2
nications software
revision.

95
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 05 Status Indicates the --- 0001 OK --- Word


Inverter's commu-
nications status.

06 Serial Indicates the seri- --- Depends OK --- Long


Number al number of the on prod-
Inverter communi- uct.
cations.

07 Product Indicates the mod- --- Capacity OK --- String


Name el number. characters
• V7N A (See note
†††† 2.)
(See note 2.)

08 State Indicates the --- 03 OK --- Byte


Inverter's status.
• 3: Inverter
ready.
• 4: Inverter
error occurred.

Note: 1. The Product Code depends on the Inverter capacity. For example, the
Product Code for the CIMR-V7NA20P2 is 3001.
2. The †††† characters contain the capacity portion of the Inverter’s
model number. For example, if the Inverter is a CIMR-V7NA21P5,
the †††† characters will contain 21P5.
Message Router Object (Class 02 Hex)
The Message Router object has a function that separates the DeviceNet
communications information. Both explicit messages and I/O messages
are always assigned functions through this object. The Message Router
object itself performs only internal processes and it does not have data
that is exchanged externally.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.

96
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the Mes- --- 0001 OK --- Word


Soft- sage Router ob-
ware ject's software
Revision revision.

DeviceNet Object (Class 03 Hex)


The DeviceNet object is the object that manages information and func-
tions related to DeviceNet communications. The processing is per-
formed automatically when communications are connected, so there are
no particular functions or data used.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.
10 Set_Attribute_ Changes the contents of the speci-
Single fied attribute.

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the De- --- 0002 OK --- Word


Soft- viceNet object's
ware software revision.
Revision

97
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 01 MAC ID Indicates the set- 0 to 00 OK --- Byte


ting for the MAC 63
ID. The MAC ID
can be set with the
rotary switches or
constant n150.

02 Baud Indicates the set- 0 to 2 00 OK --- Byte


Rate ting for the baud
rate. The baud
rate can be set
with the rotary
switches or con-
stant n150.
• 0: 125 kbps
• 1: 250 kbps
• 2: 500 kbps

05 Alloca- Indicates the De- --- 00,00 OK --- Byte


tion In- viceNet communi- x2
forma- cations connection
tion information.

Assembly Object (Class 04 Hex)


The Assembly object is the object related to the I/O message function.
The I/O message function is configured by this object for communica-
tions.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.
10 Set_Attribute_ Changes the contents of the speci-
Single fied attribute.

98
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the As- --- 0002 OK --- Word


Soft- sembly object's
ware software revision.
Revision

14 03 Data This function is See --- OK OK Byte x


the same as the note 1. 4
Basic I/O In-
stance (input).

15 03 Data This function is See --- OK OK Byte x


the same as the note 1. 4
Extended I/O In-
stance (input).

46 03 Data This function is --- --- OK --- Byte x


the same as the 4
Basic I/O In-
stance (output).

47 03 Data This function is --- --- OK --- Byte x


the same as the 4
Extended I/O In-
stance (output).

64 03 Data This function is See --- OK OK Byte x


the same as the note 1. 5
MEMOBUS I/O In-
stance (input).

65 03 Data This function is See --- OK OK Byte x


the same as the note 1. 8
V7 Standard Con-
trol I/O Instance
(input).

69 03 Data This function is See --- OK OK Byte x


the same as the note 1. 8
Extended
MEMOBUS I/O In-
stance (input).

96 03 Data This function is --- --- OK --- Byte x


the same as the 5
MEMOBUS I/O In-
stance (output).

97 03 Data This function is --- --- OK --- Byte x


the same as the 8
V7 Standard Con-
trol I/O Instance
(output).

9B 03 Data This function is --- --- OK --- Byte x


the same as the 8
Extended
MEMOBUS I/O In-
stance (output).

* 1. The setting ranges are the same as the ranges for the corresponding I/O
message functions.

99
* 2. When I/O message communications are enabled, the data set here will be
overwritten by the I/O message data. Do not use this object when I/O
message communications are enabled.
DeviceNet Connection Object (Class 05 Hex)
The DeviceNet object is the object that manages information and func-
tions related to DeviceNet communications connections. This object’s
information and functions are used when connecting and initializing
communications with the master.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.
10 Set_Attribute_ Changes the contents of the speci-
Single fied attribute.

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the De- --- 0001 OK --- Word


Soft- viceNet Connec-
ware tion object's
Revision software revision.

01 01 State Indicates the in- --- 03 OK --- Byte


stance status.
00: Does not exist
in network or ini-
tializing.
01: Online and
waiting for connec-
tion from master.
02: Waiting for
connection ID to
be written.
03: Connection
completed.
04: Timeout

02 Instance Indicates the in- --- 00 OK --- Byte


type stance type.
00: Explicit mes-
sage
01: I/O message

03 Trans- Indicates the --- 83 OK --- Byte


port Inverter’s commu-
class nications format
trigger with a code.

100
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 04 Pro- Indicates the label --- --- OK --- Word


duced that is used in the
connec- Inverter’s commu-
tion ID nications header.
These values are
05 Con- set when the com- --- --- OK --- Word
sumed munications con-
connec- nection is
tion ID completed.

06 Initial Indicates the --- 21 OK --- Byte


comm Inverter’s commu-
charac- nications format
teristics with a code.

07 Pro- Indicates the maxi- --- 0014 OK --- Word


duced mum number of
connec- bytes for transmis-
tion size sions.

08 Con- Indicates the maxi- --- 0014 OK --- Word


sumed mum number of
connec- bytes for recep-
tion size tions.

09 Expect- Indicates the time- 0 to 09C4 OK OK Word


ed pack- out time for inter- 65,53 (2,500 ms)
et rate nal processing 5 ms
after a communi-
cations request
was received. (Set
in multiples of
10 ms.)

0C Watch- Indicates the ac- --- 01 OK --- Byte


dog tim- tion to take when a
eout timeout occurred
action during internal pro-
cessing related to
communications.
00: Maintain until
reset or discon-
nected.
01: Disconnect au-
tomatically.
02: Perform the
operation again
while connected.

0D Pro- Indicates the --- 0000 OK --- Word


duced transmission con-
connec- nection path’s
tion path number of bytes.
length

0E Pro- Indicates the appli- --- --- OK --- Array


duced cation object that
connec- transmits data
tion path from the instance.

0F Con- Indicates the re- --- 0000 OK --- Word


sumed ception connection
connec- path’s number of
tion path bytes.
length

101
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 10 Con- Indicates the appli- --- --- OK --- Array


sumed cation object that
connec- receives data from
tion path the instance.

02 01 State Indicates the in- --- 03 OK --- Byte


stance status.
00: Does not exist
in network or ini-
tializing.
01: Online and
waiting for connec-
tion from master.
02: Waiting for
connection ID to
be written.
03: Connection
completed.
04: Timeout

02 Instance Indicates the in- --- 01 OK --- Byte


type stance type.
00: Explicit mes-
sage
01: I/O message

03 Trans- Indicates the --- 82 OK --- Byte


port Inverter’s commu-
class nications format
trigger with a code.

04 Pro- Indicates the label --- --- OK --- Word


duced that is used in the
connec- Inverter’s commu-
tion ID nications header.
These values are
05 Con- set when the com- --- --- OK --- Word
sumed munications con-
connec- nection is
tion ID completed.

06 Initial Indicates the --- 01 OK --- Byte


comm Inverter’s commu-
charac- nications format
teristics with a code.

07 Pro- Indicates the maxi- --- 0004 OK --- Word


duced mum number of
connec- bytes for transmis-
tion size sions.

08 Con- Indicates the maxi- --- 0004 OK --- Word


sumed mum number of
connec- bytes for recep-
tion size tions.

09 Expect- Indicates the time- 0 to 0000 OK OK Word


ed pack- out time for inter- 65,53 (0 ms)
et rate nal processing 5 ms
after a communi-
cations request
was received. (Set
in multiples of
10 ms.)

102
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

02 0C Watch- Indicates the ac- --- 00 OK --- Byte


dog tim- tion to take when a
eout timeout occurred
action during internal pro-
cessing related to
communications.
00: Maintain until
reset or discon-
nected.
01: Disconnect au-
tomatically.
02: Perform the
operation again
while connected.

0D Pro- Indicates the --- 0003 OK --- Word


duced transmission con-
connec- nection path’s
tion path number of bytes.
length

0E Pro- Indicates the appli- --- 62,34,37 OK --- Array


duced cation object that
connec- transmits data
tion path from the instance.

0F Con- Indicates the re- --- 0003 OK --- Word


sumed ception connection
connec- path’s number of
tion path bytes.
length

10 Con- Indicates the appli- --- 62,31,35 OK --- Array


sumed cation object that
connec- receives data from
tion path the instance.

Motor Data Object (Class 28 Hex)


The Motor Data object is the object that manages information and func-
tions related to the motor connected to the Inverter. The motor’s rated
current and rated voltage can be set or referenced with this object.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.
10 Set_Attribute_ Changes the contents of the speci-
Single fied attribute.

103
• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the Mo- --- 0001 OK --- Word


Soft- tor Data object's
ware software revision.
Revision

01 03 Motor Indicates the type --- 07 OK --- Byte


Type of motor being
used.
7: Squirrel-cage
induction motor

06 Rated This attribute can 0 to See note OK OK Word


Current be used to set/ref- 150% 1.
erence the mo- of the
tor’s rated current. Invert-
Setting units: er’s
0.1 A rated
current

07 Rated This attribute can 0 to 00C8 OK OK Word


Voltage be used to set/ref- 255 V See note
erence the mo- See 2.
tor’s rated voltage. note 2.
Setting units: 1 V

* 1. The factory setting of the motor rated current depends on the Inverter’s
capacity.
* 2. The table shows the setting range and factory setting for a 200 V Class
Inverter. Double these values when using a 400 V Class Inverter.
Control Supervisor Object (Class 29 Hex)
The Control Supervisor object is the object that manages information
and functions related to the Inverter’s control I/O. Basic control I/O
functions are assigned to this object, such as the Inverter’s Run, Stop,
and Fault Detect controls.
The Control Supervisor object’s functions are shared with the I/O mes-
sage communications functions. When an I/O message communications
connection is established, the values set with this object will be over-
written by the values set by I/O messages.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.

104
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
10 Set_Attribute_ Changes the contents of the speci-
Single fied attribute.
05 Reset Resets the Inverter.

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the Con- --- 0001 OK --- Word


Soft- trol Supervisor ob-
ware ject's software
Revision revision.

01 03 Run1 Runs the Inverter 00,01 00 OK OK Byte


forward.
00: Stop.
01: Run forward.

04 Run Rev Runs the Inverter 00,01 00 OK OK Byte


in reverse.
00: Stop.
01: Run in re-
verse.

05 NetCtrl Sets the RUN 00,01 00 OK OK Byte


command right.
00: Use the RUN
command input
method set in con-
stant n003 (RUN
Command Selec-
tion).
01: Enables the
RUN command
from DeviceNet
(byte 0, bits 0 and
1).

06 State Indicates the --- 03 OK --- Byte


Inverter’s status.
02: Inverter prepa-
ration not complet-
ed.
03: Inverter prepa-
ration completed
(stopped).
04: Operating
(normal).
05: Decelerated to
a stop (normal).
06: Decelerated to
a stop because of
serious fault.
07: Stopped be-
cause of serious
fault.

105
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 07 Running Indicates the --- 00 OK --- Byte


1 Inverter’s operat-
ing status.
00: Stopped, oper-
ating in reverse, or
applying DC injec-
tion braking (Re-
verse RUN
command ON).
01: Operating for-
ward or applying
DC injection brak-
ing (Reverse RUN
command OFF).

08 Running Indicates the --- 00 OK --- Byte


2 Inverter’s operat-
ing status.
00: Stopped, oper-
ating forward, or
applying DC injec-
tion braking (Re-
verse RUN
command OFF).
01: Operating in
reverse or apply-
ing DC injection
braking (Reverse
RUN command
ON).

09 Ready Indicates the --- 00 OK --- Byte


Inverter’s prepara-
tion status.
00: Fault detected
or initializing.
01: Preparations
for operation com-
pleted.

0A Faulted Indicates that the --- 00 OK --- Byte


Inverter detected
a fault.
00: Normal
01: Fault detected.

0B Warning Indicates that the --- 00 OK --- Byte


Inverter detected
a warning.
00: Normal
01: Warning de-
tected.

0C Fault Resets the 00,01 00 OK OK Byte


Reset Inverter from fault
status.
00: ---
01: Reset fault.

0D Fault The fault code in- --- 0000 OK --- Word


Code dicates which fault
was detected by
the Inverter. (See
note 3.)

106
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 0F Ctrl Indicates which --- 00 OK --- Byte


From RUN command in-
Net put has been se-
lected in the
Inverter.
00: A RUN com-
mand input other
than DeviceNet is
enabled.
01: The RUN
command input
from DeviceNet is
enabled.

10 DN Fault Indicates the oper- --- 02 OK --- Byte


Mode ation selected
when a De-
viceNet fault oc-
curs. (See note 2.)
02: Specific to the
manufacturer

11 Force Inputs the external 00,01 00 OK OK Byte


Fault fault (EF0).
00: ---
01: External fault
(EF0)

12 Force Indicates the in- --- 00 OK --- Byte


Status put status of the
external fault
(EF0).
00: ---
01: External fault
(EF0) being input.

* 1. This setting cannot be changed while the Inverter is running.


* 2. This object cannot be used to change the operation performed when a
DeviceNet communications error occurs. The Inverter will detect the
error and stop if a DeviceNet communications error has occurred. The
MEMOBUS Timeover Detection constant (n151) can be used to set the
method used to stop the Inverter when a communications error has
occurred.
* 3. Fault Code List
• If using software No. 0013 (for Inverters of 4.0 kW or less) or
No. 0101 (5.5/7.5 kW)

DeviceNet Operator Meaning


Fault Code Fault Dis-
(Hex) play
0000 --- Inverter normal
2200 oL2 Inverter overload

107
DeviceNet Operator Meaning
Fault Code Fault Dis-
(Hex) play
2300 oC Overcurrent
2310 oL1 Motor overload
2330 GF*1 Ground fault

2340 SC*1 Load short-circuit

3130 PF Main circuit voltage fault


LF Output open phase
3210 ov Main circuit overvoltage
3220 Uv1 Main circuit undervoltage
4210 oH Heatsink overheating
5110 Uv2 Control power supply error
5210 F05 Inverter A/D converter fault
5300 oPr Operator connecting fault
F07 Operator control circuit fault
6320 F04 Inverter EEPROM fault
7112 rH *1 Built-in braking resistor overheating

8100 bUS DeviceNet communications fault

8200 FbL PID feedback loss


8311 oL3 Overtorque
8321 UL3 Undertorque

108
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

DeviceNet Operator Meaning


Fault Code Fault Dis-
(Hex) play
9000 STP Emergency stop
EF3 External fault (input terminal S3)
EF4 External fault (input terminal S4)
EF5 External fault (input terminal S5)*2
EF6 External fault (input terminal S6)*2
EF7 External fault (input terminal S7)*2
EF0 External fault from communications
* 1. These faults are not detected in Inverters with a capacity of 4.0 kW or
less.
* 2. These faults are displayed only when they have been operated through
DeviceNet communications. There are no corresponding external input
terminals.
• If using software No.0010 to 0012 (for Inverters of 4.0 kW or
less) or No.0100 (5.5/7.5 kW)

DeviceNet Operator Meaning


Fault Code Fault Dis-
(Hex) play
0000 --- Inverter normal
2200 OL2 Inverter overload
2220 OL1 Motor overload
2221 OL3 Overtorque 1
2300 OC Overcurrent
3210 OV Main circuit overvoltage
3220 UV1 Main circuit undervoltage
4200 OH Heatsink overheating
5110 UV2 Control power supply error
109
DeviceNet Operator Meaning
Fault Code Fault Dis-
(Hex) play
5300 OPR Operator not connected
7500 BUS Inverter communications error
9000 EF3 External fault (input terminal S3)
EF4 External fault (input terminal S4)
EF5 External fault (input terminal S5)*
EF6 External fault (input terminal S6)*
EF7 External fault (input terminal S7)*
EF0 External fault from communications
* These faults are displayed only when they have been operated through
DeviceNet communications. There are no corresponding external input ter-
minals.

110
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

AC/DC Drive Object (Class 2A Hex)


The AC/DC Drive object is the object that manages information and
functions related to the Inverter operation. This object is used for opera-
tions such as setting the speed reference, monitoring various values, and
changing the settings.
The AC/DC Drive object’s functions are shared with the I/O message
communications functions. When an I/O message communications con-
nection is established, the values set with this object will be overwritten
by the values set by I/O messages.
• Supported Services

Service Service Name Description


Code
(Hex)
0E Get_Attribute_ Returns the contents of the specified
Single attribute.
10 Set_Attribute_ Changes the contents of the speci-
Single fied attribute.

• Object Contents
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

00 01 Object Indicates the AC/ --- 0001 OK --- Word


Soft- DC Drive object's
ware software revision.
Revision

01 03 At Refer- Indicates that the --- 00 OK --- Byte


ence Inverter’s frequen-
cy detection level
was detected.
00: Stopped, accel-
erating, or deceler-
ating.
01: Frequency
matches.

111
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 04 NetRef Sets the Frequen- 00,01 00 OK OK Byte


cy Reference right.
(See note 1.)
00: Use the Fre-
quency Reference
input method set in
constant n004
(Frequency Refer-
ence Selection).
01: Enables the
Frequency Refer-
ence from De-
viceNet (bytes 2
and 3).

06 Drive Sets the Inverter's 00 to 01 OK OK Byte


Mode control mode. (See 03
note 3.)
00: Vector control
01: V/f control

07 Speed Indicates the --- 0000 OK --- Word


Actual Inverter’s speed.
(See note 2.)
Minimum units: r/
min/2SS
SS
: Speed scale
(attribute 16)

08 Speed Sets or references 0 to 0000 OK OK Word


Ref the Inverter’s max.
speed reference. fre-
(See note 2.) quen-
Minimum units: r/ cy
min/2SS
SS: Speed scale
(attribute 16)

09 Current Indicates the --- 0000 OK --- Word


Actual Inverter’s output
current.
Minimum units:
0.1 A/2CS
CS
: Current scale
(attribute 17)

0F Power Indicates the --- 0000 OK --- Word


Actual Inverter’s output
power.
Minimum units: W/
2PS
PS: Power scale
(attribute 1A)

112
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 10 Input Indicates the --- 00C8 (200 OK --- Word


Voltage Inverter’s input V) or 0190
voltage. (400 V)
Minimum units: V/
2VS
VS: Voltage scale
(attribute 1B)

11 Output Indicates the --- 0000 OK --- Word


Voltage Inverter’s output
voltage.
Minimum units: V/
2VS
VS
: Voltage scale
(attribute 1B)

12 Accelera Sets or references 0 to 2710 (10.0 OK OK Word


tion the Inverter’s Ac- 6,000 s)
Time celeration Time 1 s
(n019).
Minimum units: ms/
2TS
TS: Time scale (at-
tribute 1C)

13 Decelera Sets or references 0 to 2710 (10.0 OK OK Word


tion the Inverter’s De- 6,000 s)
Time celeration Time 1 s
(n020).
Minimum units: ms/
2TS
TS
: Time scale (at-
tribute 1C)

14 Low Spd Sets or references 0 to 0000 OK OK Word


Limit the Inverter’s Fre- 110%
quency Reference of the
Lower Limit (n034). max.
(See notes 2 and fre-
3.) quen-
Minimum units: r/ cy
min/2SS
SS
: Speed scale
(attribute 16)

15 High Sets or references 0 to 0708 OK OK Word


Spd Lim- the Inverter’s Fre- 110% (1,800 r/m)
it quency Reference of the
Upper Limit (n033). max.
(See notes 2 and fre-
3.) quen-
Minimum units: r/ cy
min/2SS
SS
: Speed scale
(attribute 16)

113
In- At- Name Contents Setting Factory Set- Read Write Size
stance tribute Range ting (Hex)

01 16 Speed Sets or references -15 to 00 OK OK Byte


Scale the unit coefficient 15
(n153) for speed- (F1 to
related data. 0F)
Speed units: 1 (r/
min) x 1/2SS
SS
: Speed scale
setting

17 Current Sets or references -15 to 00 OK OK Byte


Scale the unit coefficient 15
(n154) for current- (F1 to
related data. 0F)
Current units: 0.1
(A) x 1/2CS
CS: Current scale
setting

1A Power Sets or references -15 to 00 OK OK Byte


Scale the unit Coefficient 15
(n155) for power- (F1 to
related data. 0F)
Power units: 1 (W)
x 1/2PS
PS
: Power scale
setting

1B Voltage Sets or references -15 to 00 OK OK Byte


Scale the unit coefficient 15
(n156) for voltage- (F1 to
related data. 0F)
Voltage units: 1 (V)
x 1/2VS
VS: Voltage scale
setting

1C Time Sets or references -15 to 00 OK OK Byte


Scale the unit coefficient 15
(n157) for time-re- (F1 to
lated data. 0F)
Time units: 1 (ms)
x 1/2TS
TS
: Time scale set-
ting

1D Ref Indicates which --- 00 OK --- Byte


From Frequency Refer-
Net ence input has
been selected in
the Inverter. (See
note 4.)
00: A Frequency
Reference input
other than De-
viceNet is enabled.
01: The Frequen-
cy Reference input
from DeviceNet is
enabled.

* 1. When a 400 V Class Inverter is being used, the value will be 0190 Hex
(400 V).

114
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

* 2. Always set the Number of Motor Poles (2 to 39) in Inverter constant n035
when using the Speed Ref, Speed Actual, Low Spd Limit, or High Spd
Limit settings.
* 3. The Drive Mode, Low Spd Limit, and High Spd Limit settings cannot be
changed while the Inverter is running.
* 4. These settings cannot be changed while the Inverter is running.

115
„ Error Code Tables
† Explicit Message Communications Errors
When there is a problem with a request message sent from the master in
explicit communications, the Inverter will return a response message
with 94 as the service code well as one of the following error codes as
the data.

Error Contents Cause Corrective Action


Code
08FF Service not The service code Correct the ser-
supported is incorrect. vice code.
09FF Invalid The attribute is in- Correct the at-
attribute value correct. tribute.
0CFF Object state Attempted to Stop the Inverter.
conflict change an
Inverter constant
that cannot be
changed while the
Inverter is run-
ning.
0EFF Attribute not Attempted to Correct the ser-
settable change a read- vice code or at-
only attribute. tribute setting.
13FF Not enough The data size is Correct the data
data incorrect. size.
14FF Attribute not Attempted to exe- Correct the ser-
supported cute a service that vice code or at-
is not defined for tribute setting.
the attribute.
15FF Too much The data size is Correct the data
data incorrect. size.
16FF Object does An unsupported Correct the class
not exist object was speci- or instance set-
fied. ting.

116
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Error Contents Cause Corrective Action


Code
1FFF Vendor spe- • Attempted to • Stop the
cific error change an Inverter.
Inverter con- • Specify a value
stant that can- that is within
not be changed the setting
while the range.
Inverter is run-
ning.
• Attempted to
change an
Inverter con-
stant to a value
outside of the
setting range.
20FF Invalid param- Attempted to Specify a data val-
eter change to a data ue that is within
value outside of the setting range.
the setting range.
† MEMOBUS I/O Instance Error Table
The following errors can occur when using the MEMOBUS I/O
Instance to set or reference Inverter constants.

Error Contents Cause


Code
01 Hex Function A function code other than 00 Hex, 03
code error Hex, or 10 Hex was sent from the mas-
ter.
02 Hex Improper • No register number has been regis-
register tered to specify the register to be
number accessed.
• ENTER command 0900H was exe-
cuted for a write-only register.

117
Error Contents Cause
Code
21 Hex Data set- • A simple upper/lower limit error
ting error occurred with control data or constant
write operation.
• A constant setting error occurred
when a constant was written.
22 Hex Write-in • Attempted to write a constant from the
mode error master while Inverter was running.
• Attempted to write a constant from the
master with the ENTER command
while Inverter was running.
• Attempted to write a constant from the
master during a UV (undervoltage)
occurrence.
• Attempted to write a constant from the
master with the ENTER command
during a UV (undervoltage) occur-
rence.
• Attempted to write a constant other
than n01= 8, 9, 10, 11, or 20 (Con-
stant Initialization) from the master
during an F04 occurrence.
• Attempted to write a constant from the
master while data was being stored.
• Attempted to write data from the mas-
ter but the data was read-only.

118
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

„ MEMOBUS Register Tables


Reference Data (Read/Write Registers)
Write zeroes in the unused bits. Do not write any data in the reserved
registers.

Register Contents
Number

0000H Reserved

0001H Operation signals

Bit 0 RUN command


1: RUN
0: STOP

1 Reverse RUN command


1: Reverse run
0: Stop

2 Multi-function input reference 3


(Function selected by n052.)

3 Multi-function input reference 4


(Function selected by n053.)

4 Multi-function input reference 5*


(Function selected by n054.)

5 Multi-function input reference 6*


(Function selected by n055.)

6 Multi-function input reference 7*


(Function selected by n056.)

7 Not used.

8 External fault
1: Fault (EF0)

9 Fault reset
1: RESET command

A Not used.

B to Not used.
F

0002H Frequency reference (Units set in n035.)

0003H V/f gain (1000/100%)


Setting range: 2.0 to 200.0%

0004H to Reserved
0008H

119
Register Contents
Number

0009H Output terminal status

Bit 0 Multi-function output reference 1*


(Enabled when n057 is set to 18.)
1: MA ON
0: MA OFF

1 Multi-function output reference 2


(Enabled when n058 is set to 18.)
1: P1 ON
0: P1 OFF

2 Multi-function output reference 3


(Enabled when n059 is set to 18.)
1: P2 ON
0: P2 OFF

3 to Not used.
F

000AH to Reserved
001FH
* These I/O signals can be used from DeviceNet communications only. There
are no corresponding external input or output terminals.

120
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Monitor Data (Read-only Registers)


Register Contents
Number

0020H Status signals

Bit 0 Forward run


1: Run
0: Stop

1 Reverse run
1: Reverse run
0: Forward run

2 Inverter ready for operation

3 Fault

4 Data setting error


1: Error

5 Multi-function output 1
1: MA ON

6 Multi-function output 2
1: P1 ON

7 Multi-function output 3
1: P2 ON

8 to F Not used.

121
Register Contents
Number

0021H Fault contents

Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC)

1 Overvoltage (OV)

2 Inverter overload (OL2)

3 Inverter overheat (OH)

4 Not used.

5 Not used.

6 PID feedback loss (FbL)

7 External fault (EF, EF0), Emergency stop (STP)

8 Hardware fault (F††)

9 Motor overload (OL1)

A Overtorque detected (OL3)

B Not used.

C Power loss (UV1)

D Control power fault (UV2)

E Not used.

F Operator connection fault (OPR)

0022H Data link status

Bit 0 Writing data

1 Not used.

2 Not used.

3 Upper/lower limit fault

4 Consistency fault

5 Not used.

6 Not used.

7 Not used.

8 to F Not used.

122
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Register Contents
Number

0023H Frequency reference (Units set in n035.)

0024H Output frequency (Units set in n035.)

0025H to Reserved
0027H

0028H Output voltage reference (1/1V)

0029H to Reserved
002AH

002BH Sequence input status

Bit 0 Terminal S1 (1: Closed)

1 Terminal S2 (1: Closed)

2 Terminal S3 (1: Closed)

3 Terminal S4 (1: Closed)

4 Terminal S5* (1: Closed)

5 Terminal S6* (1: Closed)

6 Terminal S7* (1: Closed)

7 Not used.

8 to F Not used.

123
Register Contents
Number

002CH Inverter status

Bit 0 Run (1: Run)

1 Zero-speed (1: Zero-speed)

2 Frequency match (1: Match)

3 Minor fault (Alarm indicated.)

4 Frequency detection 1
(1: Output frequency ≤ setting in n095)

5 Frequency detection 1
(1: Output frequency ≥ setting in n095)

6 Inverter ready for operation (1: Ready)

7 Undervoltage detection
(1: Undervoltage being detected.)

8 Baseblock
(1: Inverter output baseblock in progress.)

9 Frequency reference mode


1: Not through communications
0: Through communications

A RUN command mode


1: Not through communications
0: Through communications

B Overtorque detection
(1: Overtorque being detected or overtorque error.)

C Reserved.

D Fault restart in progress

E Fault (1: Fault)

F Not used.
* These input signals can be used from DeviceNet communications only.
There are no corresponding external input terminals.

124
6. Operating with DeviceNet Communications

Register Contents
Number

002DH Output status

Bit 0 MA* (1: Closed)

1 P1 (1: Closed)

2 P2 (1: Closed)

3 Not used.

4 Not used.

5 Not used.

6 Not used.

7 Not used.

8 to F Not used.

002EH to Reserved.
0030H

0031H Main circuit DC voltage (1/1 V)

0032H Torque monitor (1/1%; 100%/Rated motor torque; signed)

0033H to Not used.


0036H

0037H Output power (100/1 KW; signed)

0038H PID feedback value (100(%)/Input corresponding to max. output


frequency;10/1%; unsigned)

0039H PID input value (±100(%)/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; signed)

003AH PID output value (±100(%)/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%;


signed)

003BH Output current (10/1 A)

003CH to Reserved.
00FFH
* The MA output signal can be used from DeviceNet communications only.
There is no corresponding external output terminal.
Constant Data
Inverter constants can be set or referenced. For the register numbers of
the constants, refer to the list of constants given on page 242.

125
ENTER Command (Write-only Register)

Register Name Contents Setting Factory


Number Range Setting
0900H ENTER Writes constant data 0000H ---
Com- to non-volatile memo- to
mand ry (EEPROM). FFFFH
When writing a constant from the master through communications,
always execute the ENTER command after changing the constant.
When a constant is changed, the new value is written to the constant
data area in the Inverter’s RAM. The ENTER command writes the con-
stant data from RAM to the non-volatile memory in the Inverter. The
ENTER command can be executed by writing data to register number
0900H while the Inverter is stopped.
Since the Inverter’s EEPROM can be overwritten a limited number of
times (100,000 times), do not execute the ENTER command too fre-
quently. When two or more constants are being changed, execute the
ENTER command once after changing all of the constants.

CAUTION While the constant is being stored after an ENTER


command was issued, response to the commands or
data input with the keys on the Digital Operator
(JVOP-140) becomes poor. Be sure to take some mea-
sures for an emergency stop by using the external ter-
minals (setting the external terminal to run command
priority, or setting the multi-function input terminal to
external fault, external baseblock or emergency stop).

126
7. Programming Features

7. Programming Features
Factory settings of the constants are shaded in the tables.

„ Constant Setup and Initialization


† Constant Selection/Initialization (n001)
The following table lists the data that can be set or read when n001 is
set. Unused constants between n001 and n179 are not displayed.

n001 Setting Constant That Can Be Constant That Can Be Refer-


Set enced

0 n001 n001 to n179

1 n001 to n049 *1 n001 to n049

2 n001 to n079*1 n001 to n079

3 n001 to n119 *1 n001 to n119

4 n001 to n179*1 n001 to n179

5 Not used

6 Fault history cleared

7 to 11 Not used

12 Initialize

13 Initialize (3-wire sequence)*2

* 1. Excluding setting-disabled constants.


* 2. Refer to page 159.

NOTE
appears on the display for one second and the set data
returns to its initial values in the following cases.
1. If the set values of Multi-function Input Selections 1 to 7
(n050 to n056) are the same
2. If the following conditions are not satisfied in the V/f pat-
tern setting:
Max. Output Frequency (n011) ≥ Max. Voltage Output
Frequency (n013)
> Mid. Output Frequency
(n014)
≥ Min. Output Frequency

127
(n016)
For details, refer to Adjusting Torque According to Appli-
cation (V/f Pattern Setting) on page 129.
3. If the following conditions are not satisfied in the jump
frequency settings:
Jump Frequency 3 (n085) ≤ Jump Frequency 2 (n084)
≤ Jump Frequency 1 (n083)
4. If the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) ≤ Fre-
quency Reference Upper Limit (n033)
5. If the Motor Rated Current (n036) ≤ 150% of Inverter
rated current
6. If constant n018 is set to 1 (Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Unit is 0.01 s) when n018 is set to 0 and a value
exceeding 600.0 s is set for an Acceleration/Deceleration
Time (n019 to n022)

128
7. Programming Features

„ Using V/f Control Mode


V/f control mode is preset at the factory.
Control Mode Selection (n002) = 0: V/f control mode (factory setting)
1: Vector control mode
† Adjusting Torque According to Application
Adjust motor torque by using the V/f pattern and full-range automatic
torque boost settings.
V/f Pattern Setting
Set the V/f pattern in n011 to n017 as described below. Set each pattern
when using a special motor (e.g., high-speed motor) or when requiring
special torque adjustment of the machine.
V: (VOLTAGE)

Be sure to satisfy the following


conditions for the settings of n011 to
n017.
n016 ≤ n014 < n013 ≤ n0111
f
If n016 = n014, the setting of n015
(FREQUENCY) will be disabled.

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting

n011 Max. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 50.0 to 400.0 Hz 50.0 Hz

n012 Max. Voltage 1V 1 to 255.0 V (0.1 to 510.0 V) 200.0 V


(400.0 V)

n013 Max. Voltage Output Fre- 0.1 Hz 0.2 to 400.0 Hz 50.0 Hz


quency (Base Frequency)

n014 Mid. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.1 to 399.9 Hz 1.3 Hz

n015 Mid. Output Frequency 1V 0.1 to 255.0 V (0.1 to 510.0 V) 12.0 V


Voltage (24.0 V)

n016 Min. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.1 to 10.0 Hz 1.3 Hz

n017 Min. Output Frequency 1V 1 to 50.0 V (0.1 to 100.0 V) 12.0 V


Voltage (24.0 V)

129
Typical Setting of the V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern according to the application as described below. For
400-V Class Inverters, the voltage values (n012, n015, and n017)
should be doubled. When running at a frequency exceeding 50/60 Hz,
change the Maximum Output Frequency (n011).
Note: Always set the maximum output frequency according to the motor char-
acteristics.
1. For General-purpose Applications
Motor Specification: 60 Hz Motor Specification: 50 Hz
(Factory setting)

2. For Fans/Pumps
Motor Specification: 60 Hz Motor Specification: 50 Hz

3. For Applications Requiring High Starting Torque


Motor Specification: 60 Hz Motor Specification: 50 Hz

Increasing the voltage of the V/f pattern increases motor torque, but
an excessive increase may cause motor overexcitation, motor over-
heating, or vibration.
Note: Constant n012 must be set to motor rated voltage.

130
7. Programming Features

Full-range Automatic Torque Boost (when V/f Mode Is


Selected: n002=0)
The motor torque requirement changes according to load conditions.
The full-range automatic torque boost adjusts the voltage of the V/f pat-
tern according to requirements. The Varispeed V7 automatically adjusts
the voltage during constant-speed operation, as well as during accelera-
tion.
The required torque is calculated by the Inverter.
This ensures tripless operation and energy-saving effects.
Output voltage Torque compensation gain (n013) Required torque

Operation
V Required torque Increase voltage
(Voltage)

f (Frequency)

Normally, no adjustment is necessary for the Torque Compensation


Gain (n103 factory setting: 1.0). When the wiring distance between the
Inverter and the motor is long, or when the motor generates vibration,
change the automatic torque boost gain. In these cases, set the V/f pat-
tern (n011 to n017).
Adjustment of the Torque Compensation Time Constant (n104) and the
Torque Compensation Iron Loss (n105) are normally not required.
Adjust the torque compensation time constant under the following con-
ditions:
• Increase the setting if the motor generates vibration.
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.

131
„ Using Vector Control Mode
Set the Control Mode Selection (n002) to use vector control mode.
n002 = 0: V/f control mode (factory setting)
1: Vector control mode
† Precautions for Voltage Vector Control Application
Vector control requires motor constants. The Yaskawa standard motor
constants have been set at the factory prior to shipment. Therefore,
when a motor designed for an Inverter is used or when a motor from any
other manufacturer is driven, the required torque characteristics or
speed control characteristics may not be maintained because the con-
stants are not suitable. Set the following constants so that they match the
required motor constants.

Con- Name Unit Setting Fac-


stant Range tory
No. Setting

n106 Motor Rated Slip 0.1 Hz 0.0 to *


20.0 Hz

n107 Line to Neutral (per 0.001 Ω (less than 0.000 to *


Phase) 10 Ω) 0.01 Ω (10 Ω 65.50 Ω
or more)

n036 Motor Rated Current 0.1 A 0% to 150% *


of Inverter
rated current

n110 Motor No-load Current 1% 0% to 99% *


(100% =
motor rated
current)

* Setting depends on Inverter capacity.


Adjustment of the Torque Compensation Gain (n103) and the Torque
Compensation Time Constant (n104) is normally not required.
Adjust the torque compensation time constant under the following con-
ditions:
• Increase the setting if the motor generates vibration.
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
Adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (n111) while driving the load so that
the target speed is reached. Increase or decrease the setting in incre-
ments of 0.1.
• If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensa-
tion gain.
132
7. Programming Features

• If the speed is more than the target value, reduce the slip compensa-
tion gain.
Adjustment of the Slip Compensation Time Constant (n112) is normally
not required. Adjust it under the following conditions:
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
• Increase the setting if speed is unstable.
Select slip compensation status during regeneration as follows:

n113 Setting Slip Correction during Regenerative Operation


0 Disabled
1 Enabled

† Motor Constant Calculation


An example of motor constant calculation is shown below.
1. Motor Rated Slip (n106)
120 × motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
Number of motor poles Motor rated speed (r/min)*2

120/Number of motor poles

2. Line to Neutral (per Phase) (n107)


Calculations are based on the line-to-line resistance and insulation
grade of the motor test report.
E type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 75°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×

B type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 75°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×

F type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 115°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×

3. Motor Rated Current (n036)


= Rated current at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1 (A)
4. Motor No-load Current (n110)
No-load current (A) at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
100 (%)
Rated current (A) at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1

* 1. Base frequency (Hz) during constant output control


* 2. Rated speed (r/min) at base frequency during constant output control
Set n106 (Motor Rated Slip), n036 (Motor Rated Current), n107 (Line
to Neutral (per Phase)), and n110 (Motor No-load Current) according to

133
the motor test report.
To connect a reactor between the Inverter and the motor, set n108 to the
sum of the initial value of n108 (Motor Leakage Inductance) and the
externally mounted reactor inductance. Unless a reactor is connected,
n108 (Motor Leakage Inductance) does not have to be set according to
the motor.
† V/f Pattern during Vector Control
Set the V/f pattern as follows during vector control:
The following examples are for 200 V Class motors. When using 400 V
Class motors, double the voltage settings (n012, n015, and n017).
Standard V/F
(V) [Motor Specification: 60 Hz] (V) [Motor Specification: 50 Hz]

(Hz) (Hz)

High Starting Torque V/F


(V) [Motor Specification: 60 Hz] (V) [Motor Specification: 50 Hz]

(Hz) (Hz)

134
7. Programming Features

When operating with frequency larger than 60/50 Hz, change only the
Max. Output Frequency (n011).
Constant output or
Constant torque variable output

n012
=200 V

Base point

n013 n011
=50 Hz =90 Hz

„ Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode


The following functions can be selected by switching LOCAL or
REMOTE mode. To select the RUN/STOP command or frequency ref-
erence, change the mode in advance depending on the following appli-
cations.
• LOCAL mode: Enables the Digital Operator for RUN/STOP com-
mands and FWD/REV RUN commands. The fre-
quency reference can be set using the potentiometer
or .
• REMOTE mode: Enables RUN Command Selection (n003).

135
† How to Select LOCAL/REMOTE Mode
When LOCAL/REMOTE When LOCAL/REMOTE
switching function is not switching function is set
set for multi-function for multi-function input
input selection selection
(When 17 is not set (When 17 is set for
for any of constants any of constants
n050 to n056) n050 to n056)

Select Lo for Select rE for Turn ON multi- Turn OFF multi-


operator operator function input function input
LO/RE selection. LO/RE selection. terminal. terminal.

LOCAL mode REMOTE mode

„ Selecting RUN/STOP Commands


Refer to Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Modes (page 135) to select either
the LOCAL mode or REMOTE mode.
The operation method (RUN/STOP commands, FWD/REV RUN com-
mands) can be selected using the following method.
† LOCAL Mode
When Lo (local mode) is selected for Digital Operator ON
mode, or when the LOCAL/REMOTE switching function is set and the
input terminals are turned ON, run operation is enabled by the or
on the Digital Operator, and FWD/REV is enabled by the
ON mode (using or key).

136
7. Programming Features

† REMOTE Mode
1. Select remote mode.
There are following two methods to select remote mode.

• Select rE (remote mode) for the selection.


• When the local/remote switching function is selected for the
multi-function input selection, turn OFF the input terminal to
select remote mode.
2. Select the operation method by setting constant n003.
n003=0: Enables the Digital Operator (same with local mode).
=1: Enables the multi-function input terminal (see fig. below).
=3: Enables DeviceNet communications.
• Example when using the multi-function input terminal as opera-
tion reference (two-wire sequence)

FWD RUN/STOP n003: 1 (Factory setting: 0)


REV RUN/STOP n050: 1 (Factory setting)
n051: 2 (Factory setting)

For an example of three-wire sequence, refer to page 159.


Note: When the Inverter is operated without the Digital Operator, always set
constant n010 to 0.
† Operating (RUN/STOP Commands) Using DeviceNet Com-
munications
Setting constant n003 to 3 in REMOTE mode enables using RUN/
STOP commands via DeviceNet communications. For commands using
DeviceNet communications, refer to page 55.

„ Selecting Frequency Reference


Select REMOTE or LOCAL mode in advance. For the method for
selecting the mode, refer to page 135.
† LOCAL Mode
Select command method using constant n008.
n008=0: Enables using the potentiometer on the Digital Operator.
=1: Enables digital setting on the Digital Operator
(factory setting).
The factory setting for models with the Digital Operator
with a potentiometer (JVOP-140) is n008=0.
137
• Digital Setting Using the Digital Operator
Input the frequency while FREF is lit (press ENTER after setting the
numeric value).
Frequency reference setting is effective when 1 (Factory setting: 0) is
set for constant n009 instead of pressing ENTER.
n009 =0: Enables frequency reference setting using the ENTER key.
=1: Disables frequency reference setting using the ENTER key.
† REMOTE Mode
Select the command method in constant n004.
n004 =0: Enables frequency reference setting using the potentiometer
on the Digital Operator.
=1: Enables using frequency reference 1 (n024) (factory setting)
Factory setting of models with the Digital Operator with a
potentiometer (JVOP-140) is n004=0.
=7: Enables a voltage reference on Digital Operator circuit
terminal (0 to 10)
=8: Enables current reference on Digital Operator circuit
terminal (4 to 20mA)
=9: Enables DeviceNet communications.

138
7. Programming Features

„ Setting Operation Conditions


† Reverse Run Prohibit (n006)
The Reverse Run Prohibit setting disables accepting a reverse RUN
command from the control circuit terminal or Digital Operator. This set-
ting is used for applications where a reverse RUN command can cause
problems.

Setting Description
0 Reverse run enabled.
1 Reverse run disabled.

† Multi-step Speed Selection


Up to 16 speed steps can be set using DeviceNet communications and
the following combinations of frequency reference and input terminal
selections.
8-step speed change
n003=1 (operation mode selection) n054=1 (Multi-function contact input terminal 2)
n004=1 (Frequency reference selection) n055=2 (Multi-function contact input terminal 3)
n024=750 r/min (Frequency reference 1) n056=3 (Multi-function contact input terminal 4)
n025=900 r/min (Frequency reference 2) Do not set constants n054 through N057 to 6, 7, or 8.
n026=1050 r/min (Frequency reference 3)
n027=1200 r/min (Frequency reference 4) FWD
n028=1350 r/min (Frequency reference 5) RUN/STOP
MULTI-STEP
n029=1500 r/min (Frequency reference 6) SPEED REF 1
n030=1650 r/min (Frequency reference 7) MULTI-STEP
SPEED REF 2
n031=1800 r/min (Frequency reference 8) MULTI-STEP
SPEED REF 3

NOTE When all multi-function


reference inputs are OFF, the
frequency reference selected
by constant n004 (frequency
reference selection) becomes
effective.

139
(n031) 1800 r/min
(n030) 1650 r/min
(n029) 1500 r/min
(n028) 1350 r/min
(n027) 1200 r/min
(n026) 1050 r/min
(n025) 900 r/min
Frequency (n024) 750 r/min
reference

Time

FWD RUN/STOP
Multi-step speed ref. 1
(terminal S2)
Multi-step speed ref. 2
(terminal S3)
Multi-step speed ref. 3
(terminal S4)

n050 = 1 (input terminal S1) (Factory Setting)


n051 = 6 (input terminal S2)
n052 = 7 (input terminal S3)
n053 = 8 (input terminal S4)
n054 = * (input terminal S5) (See note.)
n055 = * (input terminal S6) (See note.)
n056 = * (input terminal S7) (See note.)
* Set a value other than 6, 7, or 8.
Note: Input terminals S5 to S7 can be used only from DeviceNet communica-
tions. There are no corresponding external input terminals.
Up to 16 speed steps can be set using DeviceNet communications and
the following combinations of frequency reference and input terminal
selections.
Set frequency references 9-16 for n120 to n127.
Set the input terminal for a multi-step speed reference using the multi-
function input selection.

140
7. Programming Features

† Operating at Low Speed


By inputting a JOG command and then a FORWARD (REVERSE)
RUN command, operation is enabled at the jog frequency set in n032.
When multi-step speed references 1, 2, 3 or 4 are input simultaneously
with the JOG command, the JOG command has priority.

Constant No. Name Setting


n032 Jog Frequency Factory setting: 180 r/min
n050 to n056 Jog References Set to 10 for any constant.
Note: Input terminals S1 to S7 can be used only from DeviceNet communica-
tions. There are no corresponding external input terminals.
† Adjusting Speed Setting Signal
The relationship between the analog inputs and the frequency reference
can be set to provide the frequency reference as analog inputs to Digital
Operator terminals CN2-1, CN2-2, and CN2-3.
Frequency Reference

( ) indicates the value when a current


reference input is selected.

1. Analog Frequency Reference Gain (n068 for voltage input, n071 for
current input)
The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 10 V (or
20 mA) can be set in units of 1%. (Max. Output Frequency
n011=100%)
* Factory setting: 100%
2. Analog Frequency Reference Bias (n069 for voltage input, n072 for
current input)
The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 0 V
(4 mA or 0 mA) can be set in units of 1%. (Max. Output Frequency
n011=100%)
* Factory setting: 0%
141
Typical Settings
• To operate the Inverter with a frequency reference of 0% to 100%
at an input voltage of 0 to 5 V

Max. frequency (100%)

Gain n068 = 200


Bias n069 = 0

• To operate the Inverter with a frequency reference of 50% to


100% at an input voltage of 0 to 10 V

Max. frequency (100%)

0V 10 V
Gain n068 = 100
Bias n069 = 50

† Adjusitng Frequency Upper and Lower Limits


• Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)
Frequency
Sets the upper limit of the frequency refer-
Internal
Upper Limit ence in units of 1%.
(n033)
frequency
Frequency
(n011: Max. Output Frequency = 100%)
reference
Lower LiMIT Factory setting: 100%
(n034)
Set frequency reference • Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034)
Sets the lower limit of the frequency reference in units of 1%.
(n011: Max. Output Frequency = 100%)
When operating at a frequency reference of 0, operation is continued
at the frequency reference lower limit.
However, if the frequency reference lower limit is set to less than the
Minimum Output Frequency (n016), operation is not performed.
Factory setting: 0%

142
7. Programming Features

† Using Two Acceleration/Deceleration Times


Decel Decel
Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2*
Time 1 (n020) Time 2 (n022)
(n019) (n021)
Decel
Time 1*
(n020)

Time

FORWARD (REVERSE) ON
FUN command
Multi-Step ON
Speed Reference
ON
Accel/Decel
Time Selection
(Terminals S1 to S7) (See note.)
* When deceleration to a stop is selected (n005 = 0).
By setting a multi-function input selection (either of n050 to n056) to 11
(acceleration/deceleration time select), the acceleration/deceleration
time is selected by turning ON/OFF the acceleration/deceleration time
selection terminals (terminals S1 to S7).
Note: Input terminals S5 through S7 can be used only from DeviceNet com-
munications. There are no corresponding external input terminals.
At OFF: n019 (Acceleration Time 1)
n020 (Deceleration Time 1)
At ON: n021 (Acceleration Time 2)
n022 (Deceleration Time 2)

No. Name Unit Setting Factory


Range Setting
n019 Acceleration Time 1 Refer to Refer to 10.0 s
n018 n018
n020 Deceleration Time 1 setting setting 10.0 s
n021 Acceleration Time 2 10.0 s
n022 Deceleration Time 2 10.0 s

143
n018 Settings

No. Unit Setting Range


n018 0 0.1 s 0.0 to 999.9 s (999.9 s or less)
1s 1000 to 6000 s (1000 s or more)
1 0.01 s 0.00 to 99.99 s (99.99 s or less)
0.1 s 100.0 to 600.0 s (100 s or more)
Note: Constant n018 can be set while stopped.
If a value exceeding 600.0 s is set for the acceleration/deceleration time
when n018=0 (in units of 0.1 s), 1 cannot be set for n018.
• Acceleration time
Set the time needed for the output frequency to reach 100% from 0%.
• Deceleration time
Set the time needed for the output frequency to reach 0% from 100%.
(Max. Output Frequency n011 = 100%)
† Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method (n081)

WARNING When continuous operation after power recovery is


selected, stand clear of the Inverter or the load. The
Inverter may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.

When constant n081 is set to 0 or 1, operation automatically restarts


even if a momentary power loss occurs.

Setting Description
0 Continuous operation after momentary power
loss not enabled.

1*1 Continuous operation after power recovery


within momentary power loss ridethrough time
0.5 s

2*2 Continuous operation after power recovery


(Fault output not produced.)

144
7. Programming Features

* 1. Hold the operation signal to continue operation after recovery from a


momentary power loss.
* 2. When 2 is selected, the Inverter restarts if power supply voltage recovers
while the control power supply is held.
No fault signal is output.
† S-curve Selection (n023)
To prevent shock when starting and stopping the machine, acceleration/
deceleration can be performed using an S-curve pattern.

Setting S-curve Selection


0 S-curve characteristic not provided.
1 0.2 s
2 0.5 s
3 1.0 s
Note: The S-curve characteristic time is the time from acceleration/decelera-
tion rate 0 to the normal acceleration/deceleration rate determined by the
set acceleration/deceleration time.
Frequency
reference
Output
frequency

Output
frequency
Time

S-curve characteristic time (Tsc)


The following time chart shows switching between FWD/REV run
when decelerating to a stop.
FORWARD RUN command
REVERSE RUN command Deceleration
Acceleration DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
MIN. OUTPUT FREQUENCY
n090
n016
Output frequency
Min. Output
Frequency n016
S-curve characteristics in Acceleration Deceleration

145
† Torque Detection
If an excessive load is applied to the machine, an increase in the output
current can be detected to output an alarm signal to multi-function out-
put terminal MA, P1, or P2.
To output an overtorque detection signal, set one of the output terminal
function selections n057 to n059 for overtorque detection (Setting: 6
(NO contact) or 7 (NC contact)).

Motor current

Time
Multi-function output signal
(overtorque detection signal)
Terminal MA, P1, or P2

* The overtorque detection release width (hysteresis) is set at approx. 5% of


the Inverter rated current.

Overtorque Detection Function Selection 1 (n096)

Setting Description
0 Overtorque detection not provided.
1 Detected during constant-speed running. Oper-
ation continues after detection.
2 Detected during constant-speed running. Oper-
ation stops during detection.
3 Detected during running. Operation continues
after detection.
4 Detected during running. Operation stops dur-
ing detection.
1. To detect overtorque during acceleration/deceleration, set n096 to 3 or 4.
2. To continue operation after overtorque detection, set n096 to 1 or 3.
During detection, the operator will display an alarm (flashing).
3. To stop the Inverter and generate a fault at overtorque detection, set n096
to 2 or 4. At detection, the operator will display an fault (ON).
146
7. Programming Features

Overtorque Detection Level (n098)


Set the overtorque detection current level in units of 1%. (Inverter rated
current = 100%) When detection by the output torque is selected, the
motor rated torque becomes 100%.
Factory setting: 160%
Overtorque Detection Time (n099)
If the time that the motor current exceeds the Overtorque Detection
Level (n098) is longer than Overtorque Detection Time (n099), the
overtorque detection function will operate.
Factory setting: 0.1 s
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
(n097)
When vector control mode is selected, overtorque/undertorque detec-
tion can be performed either by detecting the output current or the out-
put torque.
When V/f control mode is selected, the setting of n097 is invalid, and
overtorque/undertorque is detected by the output current.

Setting Description
0 Detected by output torque
1 Detected by output current

† Frequency Detection Level (n095)


Effective when one or more of the Multi-function Output Selections
n057, n058 and n059 are set for frequency detection (setting: 4 or 5).
Frequency detection turns ON when the output frequency is higher or
lower than the setting for the Frequency Detection Level (n095).
Frequency Detection 1
Output frequency ≥ Frequency Detection Level n095
(Set n057, n058 or n059 to 4.)
Release
width
Frequency Detection −2Hz
Level [Hz] (n095)
Output
frequency

Frequency
detection
signal

147
Frequency Detection 2
Output frequency ≤ Frequency Detection Level n095
(Set n057, n058 or n059 to 5.)
Release
width Frequency
+2Hz Detection
Level (Hz)
Output (n095)
frequency

Frequency
detection
signal

† Jump Frequencies (n083 to n086)


This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of critical frequencies
so that the motor can operate without resonance caused by the machine
system. This function is also used for dead band control. Setting the val-
ues to 0.00 Hz disables this function.
Set prohibited frequencies 1, 2, and 3 as follows:
OUTPUT FREQUENCY

n083 ≥ n084 ≥ n085


If this condition is not satisfied,
the Inverter will display for
one second and restore the
data to initial settings.
FREQUENCY REFERENCE

Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency ranges.


However, the motor will operate without jumping during acceleration/
deceleration.
† Continuing Operation Using Automatic Retry Attempts (n082)

WARNING When the fault retry function is selected, stand clear of


the Inverter or the load. The Inverter may restart sud-
denly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.

148
7. Programming Features

The Inverter can be set to restart and reset fault detection after a fault
occurs. The number of self-diagnosis and retry attempts can be set to up
to 10 in n082. The Inverter will automatically restart after the following
faults occur:
OC (overcurrent)
OV (overvoltage)
The number of retry attempts is cleared to 0 in the following cases:
1. If no other fault occurs within 10 minutes after retry
2. When the FAULT RESET signal is ON after the fault is detected
3. When the power supply is turned OFF
† Operating a Coasting Motor without Tripping
To operate a coasting motor without tripping, use the SPEED SEARCH
command or DC injection braking at startup.
SPEED SEARCH Command
Restarts a coasting motor without stopping it. This function enables
smooth switching between motor commercial power supply operation
and Inverter operation.
Set a Multi-function Input Selection (n050 to n056) to 14 (SEARCH
command from maximum output frequency) or 15 (SEARCH command
from set frequency).
Build a sequence so that a FWD (REV) RUN command is input at the
same time as the SEARCH command or after the SEARCH command.
If the RUN command is input before the SEARCH command, the
SEARCH command will be disabled.
Timechart at SEARCH Command Input

FWD (REV) RUN command

SEARCH command
Speed agreement
Max. output frequency or detection
frequency reference at
run command input

Output frequency

Min. baseblock Speed


time (0.5 s) search
operation

149
DC Injection Braking at Startup (n089, n091)
Restarts a coasting motor after stopping it. Set the DC injection braking
time at startup in n091 in units of 0.1 second. Set the DC Injection Brak-
ing Current in n089 in units of 1% (Inverter rated current =100%).
When the setting of n091 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed
and acceleration starts from the minimum output frequency.
When n089 is set to 0, acceleration starts
from the minimum output frequency after Min. Output
baseblocking for the time set in n091. Frequency
n016

n091
DC Injection Braking
Time At Startup

† Holding Acceleration/Deceleration Temporarily


To hold acceleration or deceleration, input an ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION HOLD command. The output frequency is main-
tained when an ACCELERATION/DECELERATION HOLD command
is input during acceleration or deceleration.
When the STOP command is input while an ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION PROHIBITION command is being input, the accel-
eration/deceleration hold is released and operation ramps to a stop.
Set a Multi-function Input Selection (n050 to n056) to 16 (acceleration/
deceleration prohibit).
Time Chart for ACCELERATION/DECELERATION HOLD
Command Input
FWD (REV)
RUN command
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION
HOLD command
Frequency
reference
Output
frequency
FREQUENCY
AGREE
signal
Note: If a FWD (REV) RUN command is input at the same time as an
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION HOLD command, the motor will
not operate. However, if the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) is
set to a value greater than or equal to the Min. Output Frequency (n016),
the motor will operate at the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034).

150
7. Programming Features

† Reducing Motor Noise or Leakage Current Using Carrier Fre-


quency Selection (n080)
Set the Inverter output transistor switching frequency (carrier fre-
quency).
Setting Carrier Frequency (kHz) Metallic Noise Noise and Cur-
from Motor rent Leakage

7 12 fout (Hz)

8 24 fout (Hz)

9 36 fout (Hz)
Higher Smaller
1 2.5 (kHz)

2 5.0 (kHz)

3 7.5 (kHz) Not


audible Larger
4 10.0 (kHz)

5 12.5 (kHz)

6 14.5 (kHz)

151
If the set value is 7, 8, or 9, the carrier frequency will be multiplied by
the same factor as the output frequency.
n080=7 fc=Carrier frequency

2.5 kHz
fc=12 fout

1.0 kHz
fout=Output frequency
83.3 Hz 208.3 Hz

n080=8 fc=Carrier frequency

2.5 kHz
fc=24 fout

1.0 kHz
fout=Output frequency
41.6 Hz 104.1 Hz

n080=9 fc=Carrier frequency

2.5 kHz
fc=36 fout

1.0 kHz
fout=Output frequency
27.7 Hz 69.4 Hz

The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity (kVA).


Voltage Capacity Factory Setting Maximum Reduced
Class (V) (kW) Continuous Current
Setting Carrier Fre- Output Cur- (A)
quency (kHz) rent (A)
200 V 0.1 4 10 0.8 -
Single-
phase or 0.25 4 10 1.6
3-phase
0.55 4 10 3.0
1.1 4 10 5.0
1.5 3 7.5 8.0 7.0
2.2 3 7.5 11.0 10.0
3.7 3 7.5 17.5 16.5
5.5 3 7.5 25 23
7.5 3 7.5 33 30

152
7. Programming Features

Voltage Capacity Factory Setting Maximum Reduced


Class (V) (kW) Continuous Current
Setting Carrier Fre- Output Cur- (A)
quency (kHz) rent (A)
400 V 0.37 3 7.5 1.2 1.0
3-phase
0.55 3 7.5 1.8 1.6
1.1 3 7.5 3.4 3.0
1.5 3 7.5 4.8 4.0
2.2 3 7.5 5.5 4.8
3.0 3 7.5 7.2 6.3
3.7 3 7.5 8.6 8.1
5.5 3 7.5 14.8 14.8
7.5 3 7.5 18 17.0

NOTE
1. Reduce the continuous output current when changing the
carrier frequency to 4 (10 kHz) for 200 V Class (1.5 kW
or more) and 400 V Class Inverters. Refer to the table
above for the reduced current.
Operation Condition
• Input power supply voltage:
3-phase 200 to 230 V (200 V Class)
Single-phase 200 to 240 V (200 V Class)
3-phase 380 to 460 V (400 V Class)
• Ambient temperature:
−10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)
(Protection structure: open chassis type IP20)
−10 to 40°C (14 to 105°F)
(Protection structure: top closed type IP20,
enclosed wall-mounted type NEMA 1 (TYPE 1))
2. If the wiring distance is long, reduce the Inverter carrier
frequency as described below.
Wiring Distance Up to 30 m Up to 50 m Up to 100 m More than
between Inverter 100 m
and Motor
Carrier Frequency 14.5 kHz or 10 kHz or 5 kHz or 2.5 kHz or
(n080 setting) less less less less
(n080=5, 6) (n080=1, 2, (n080=1, 2, (n080=1, 7,
3, 4, 7, 8, 9) 7, 8, 9) 8, 9)

3. Set the Carrier Frequency Selection (n080) to 1, 2, 3, or 4


when using vector control mode. Do not set it to 7, 8, or 9.
153
4. The carrier frequency is automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz
when the Reducing Carrier Frequency Selection at Low
Speed (n175) is set to 1 and the following conditions are
satisfied:
Output frequency ≤ 5 Hz
Output current ≥ 110%
Factory setting: 0 (Disabled)
5. When repeatedly starting and stopping a load that is more
than 120% of the Inverter’s rated current with a period of
less than 10 minutes, set the Reducing Carrier Frequency
Selection at Low Speed (n175) to 1.

† Operator Stop Key Selection (n007)

WARNING The Digital Operator stop button can be disabled by a


setting in the Inverter. Install a separate emergency
stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

Set the processing when the STOP key is “pressed” during operation
either from a multi-function input terminal or communications.

Setting Description
0 The STOP key is effective either from a multi-
function input terminal or communications. When
the STOP key is pressed, the Inverter stops ac-
cording to the setting of constant n005. At this
time, the Digital Operator displays a alarm
(flashing). This STOP command is held in the
Inverter until both forward and reverse RUN com-
mands are open, or until the RUN command from
communications goes to zero.
1 The STOP key is ineffective either from multi-
function input terminals or communications.

154
7. Programming Features

„ Selecting the Stopping Method


† Stopping Method Selection (n005)
Select the stopping method suitable for the application.

Setting Description
0 Deceleration to a stop
1 Coast to a stop

Deceleration to a Stop
Example when Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 is selected
Deceleration
Acceleration Min. OutputFrequency
Time 1 Deceleration
Output Time 1
(n020) Time 1 (n020) (Frequency at
frequency (n019) Dc Injection Braking
Startup) n16
(Factory setting: 1.5 Hz)

FWD (REV) Time DC Injection Braking


RUN Time at Stop (n090)
(Factory setting: 0.5 s)
command

* Changing the Frequency Reference while Running


Upon termination of a FWD (REV) RUN command, the motor deceler-
ates at the deceleration rate determined by the time set in Deceleration
Time 1 (n020) and DC injection braking is applied immediately before
stopping. DC injection braking is also applied when the motor deceler-
ates because the frequency reference is set lower than the Min. Output
Frequency (n016) when the FWD (REV) RUN command is ON. If the
deceleration time is short or the load inertia is large, an overvoltage
(OV) fault may occur at deceleration. In this case, increase the decelera-
tion time or install a optional Braking Resistor.
Braking torque: Without braking resistor: Approx. 20% of motor
rating
With braking resistor: Approx. 150% of motor
rating

155
Coast to a Stop
Example when Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 is selected
Acceleration
Time 1 Deceleration
Output (n019) Time 1
(n020) Coast to
frequency stop

Time

FWD (REV)
RUN command
* Changing the Frequency Reference while Running
Upon termination of the FWD (REV) RUN command, the motor
starts coasting.
† Applying DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking Current (n089)
Sets the DC injection braking current in units of 1%. (Inverter rated cur-
rent=100%)
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop (n090)
Sets the DC injection braking time at stopping in units of 0.1 second.
When the setting of n090 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed,
but the Inverter output is turned OFF when DC injection braking is
started.
n016 Min.
Output
Frequency

n090
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
When coasting to a stop is specified in the Stopping Method Selection
(n005), DC injection braking is not applied when stopping.

156
7. Programming Features

„ Building Interface Circuits with External Devices


† Using Input Signals
The functions of multi-function input terminals S1 to S7 can be changed
as necessary by setting constants n050 to n056. With the exception of
the value “28,” the same value cannot be set for more than one of these
constants.
The function of terminal S1 is set in constant n50. Likewise, the func-
tions of terminals S2 to S7 are set in constants n51 to n56. The follow-
ing functions can be set.

Setting Name Description Ref.

0 FWD/REV RUN command Setting possible only for 159


(3-wire sequence selection) n052.

1 FORWARD RUN command 137


(2-wire sequence selection)

2 REVERSE RUN command 137


(2-wire sequence selection)

3 External fault Inverter stops for an external -


(NO contact input) fault signal input. Digital
Operator displays EF†. *
4 External fault -
(NC contact input)

5 Fault reset Resets a fault. Fault reset -


not effective when the RUN
signal is ON.

6 Multi-step speed reference 1 139

7 Multi-step speed reference 2 139

8 Multi-step speed reference 3 139

9 Multi-step speed reference 4 139

10 JOG command 141

11 Acceleration/deceleration 143
time selection 1

12 External baseblock, Motor coasts to a stop for -


NO contact input this signal input. Digital
Operator displays .
13 External baseblock, -
NC contact input
* Numbers 1 to 7 are displayed for † to indicate the terminal numbers S1 to
S7.

157
Setting Name Description Ref.

14 SEARCH command from SPEED SEARCH command 149


maximum frequency signal

15 SEARCH command from set 149


frequency

16 ACCELERATION/ 150
DECELERATION HOLD
command

17 LOCAL/REMOTE selection 136

18 Communications/control cir- 162


cuit terminal selection

19 Emergency stop fault, Inverter stops for an emer- -


NO contact input gency stop signal input ac-
cording to the Stopping
20 Emergency stop alarm, Method Selection (n005). -
NO contact input When frequency coasting to
a stop (n005 is set to 1) is se-
21 Emergency stop fault, lected, the Inverter coasts to -
NC contact input a stop according to
Deceleration Time Setting 2
22 Emergency stop alarm, (n022). -
NC contact input Digital Operator displays
. (Lit for fault, flashing
for alarm.)

23 PID control cancel 184

24 PID integral reset 184

25 PID integral hold 184

26 Inverter overheat alert (OH3 -


alarm)

27 Acceleration/deceleration -
time selection 2

28 Data input from communica- 92


tions

34 UP/DOWN commands Setting enabled only for 160


n053 (terminal S4)

158
7. Programming Features

Factory Settings

No. Terminal Factory Setting Function

n050 S1 1 FORWARD RUN command (2-


wire sequence)

n051 S2 2 REVERSE RUN command (2-


wire sequence)

n052 S3 3 External fault

n053 S4 5 Fault reset

n054 S5 6 Multi-step speed reference 1


(See note.)

n055 S6 7 Multi-step speed reference 2


(See note.)

n056 S7 10 JOG command


(See note.)

Note: Terminals S5 through S7 can be used only from DeviceNet communica-


tions. There are no corresponding external terminals.
Terminal Functions for 3-wire Sequence Selection
When 0 is set for terminal S3 (n052), terminal S1 is the RUN command,
terminal S2 is the STOP command, and terminal S3 is the FWD/REV
RUN command.
RUN SW
STOP SW (NO contact)
Varispeed V7
(NC contact) RUN command
(Run when closed)
STOP command
(Stop when open)
FWD/REV run selection
FWD run when open
REV run when closed

WARNING To select the 3-wire sequence, set terminal S3 (n052)


to 0.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.

159
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection (Setting: 17)
Select the operation reference from either the Digital Operator or from
the settings of the RUN Command Selection (n003) and Frequency Ref-
erence Selection (n004). The LOCAL/REMOTE Selection can be used
only when stopped.
Open: Run according to the setting of RUN Command Selection
(n003) or Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
Closed: Run according to the frequency reference and RUN command
from the Digital Operator.
Example: Set n003=1, n004=7, n008=0.
Open: Run according to the frequency reference from Digital Opera-
tor terminal CN2-1 and RUN command from multi-function
input terminals S1 to S7.
Closed: Run according to the potentiometer frequency reference and
RUN command from the Digital Operator.
UP/DOWN Commands (Setting: n053 = 034)
When the FWD (REV) RUN command is ON, acceleration/deceleration
is enabled by inputting the UP or DOWN signal from multi-function
input terminals S3 and S4 without changing the frequency reference.
Operation can thus be performed at the desired speed. When UP/
DOWN commands are specified in n053, any function set in n052 is
disabled, terminal S3 is the input terminal for the UP command, and ter-
minal S4 is the input terminal for the DOWN command.

Multi-function Input Termi- Closed Open Open Closed


nal S3 (UP command)
Multi-function Input Termi- Open Closed Open Closed
nal S4 (DOWN command)
Operation Status Accele Decele Hold Hold
ration ration
Note: Terminals S5 through S7 can be used only from DeviceNet communica-
tions. There are no corresponding external terminals.

160
7. Programming Features

Time Chart for UP/DOWN Command Input

FWD RUN
UP command S3
DOWN command S4

Upper limit speed

Lower limit speed


output frequency

FREQUENCY agree
signal

U = UP (accelerating) status
D = DOWN (decelerating) status
H = HOLD (constant speed) status
U1 = UP status, clamping at upper limit speed
D1 = DOWN status, clamping at lower limit speed
Note: 1. When UP/DOWN commands are selected, the upper limit speed is set
regardless of frequency reference.
Upper limit speed =Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
× Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)/100
2. Lower limit value is either the Minimum Output Frequency (n016) or
the frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) (whichever is larger.).
3. When the FWD (REV) RUN command is input, operation starts at the
lower limit speed without using the UP/DOWN commands.
4. If the JOG command is input while running for an UP/DOWN com-
mand, the JOG command has priority.
5. Multi-step speed references 1 to 4 are not effective when an UP/
DOWN command is selected. Multi-step speed references are effec-
tive while running in hold status.
6. When 1 is set for the HOLD Output Frequency Memory Selection
(n100), the output frequency can be recorded during HOLD.

161
Setting Description
0 Output frequency is not recorded during
HOLD.
1 When HOLD status is continued for 5 seconds
or longer, the output frequency during HOLD
is recorded and the Inverter restarts at the re-
corded frequency.
Communications/Multi-function Input Terminal Selection
(Setting: 18)
Operation can be changed from DeviceNet communications commands,
or from multi-function input terminal or Digital Operator commands.
RUN commands from communications and the frequency reference are
effective when the multi-function input terminal for this setting is
closed.
RUN commands in LOCAL/REMOTE mode and the frequency refer-
ence are effective when the terminal is open.
† Using the Multi-function Analog Inputs (n077, n078)
The input analog signal (0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA) for the CN2 terminal
of the JVOP-140 Digital Operator can be used as the main speed fre-
quency reference. Refer to the block diagram on page 185 for details on
the input signal.
When using the signal for the CN2 terminal of the JVOP-140
NOTE Digital Operator as a multi-function analog input, never use it
for the target value or the feedback value of PID control. (PID
control is disabled when n128 is set to 0.)
Multi-function Input Selection (n077)

No. Name Unit Setting Factory


Range Setting
n077 Multi-function Input Selection - 0 to 4 0

162
7. Programming Features

n077 Settings

Setting Function Description


0 Disabled The multi-function input is dis-
abled.
1 Auxiliary frequency When frequency reference 2 is se-
reference (FREF2) lected using the multi-step speed
references, the input analog sig-
nal for the CN2 terminal will be the
frequency reference. The n025
setting will be invalid.
Note: Set the Frequency Refer-
ence Gain in n068 or
n071, and the Frequency
Reference Bias in n069 or
n072.
2 to 3 Not used
4 Output voltage bias Add the VBIAS to the output volt-
(VBIAS) age after V/f conversion.
Analog Input Level
1. Auxiliary Frequency Reference (n077=1) 4. Output Voltage Bias (n077=4)
FREF2 VBIAS

0V 0V 10 V
10 V
(4 mA) (20 mA) (4 mA) (20 mA)

100%=Max. output frequency (n011) The VBIAS value to be added is doubled


for 400 V-Class Inverters.

163
Multi-function Analog Input Signal Selection (n078)
Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory
No. Setting

n078 Multi-function Analog 1 0=Digital Operator ter- 0


Input Signal Selection minal (voltage: 0 to
10 V)
1=Digital Operator ter-
minal (current 4 to
20 mA)

† Using Output Signals (n057, n058, n059)


The functions of multi-function output terminals MA, P1 and P2 can be
changed as necessary by setting constants n057, n058, and n059.
• Terminal MA function: Set in n057
• Terminal P1 function: Set in n058
• Terminal P2 function: Set in n059
Note: Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There
is no corresponding external output terminal.

Setting Name Description Ref.

0 Fault Closed when Inverter fault oc- -


curs.

1 Operating Closed when either FWD/REV -


command is input or voltage is
output from the Inverter.

2 Frequency agree Closed when the set frequency 166


agrees with Inverter output fre-
quency.

3 Zero speed Closed when Inverter output fre- -


quency is less than minimum out-
put frequency.

4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency ≥ Frequency 147


Detection Level (n095)

5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency ≤ Frequency 147


Detection Level (n095)

6 Overtorque detection, - 146


NO contact output

7 Overtorque detection, - 146


NC contact output

164
7. Programming Features

Setting Name Description Ref.

8 Low torque detected, - -


NO output

9 Low torque detected, - -


NC output

10 Minor fault Closed when an alarm has been -


detected.

11 Baseblocked Closed when the Inverter output -


is OFF.

12 Operating mode Closed when LOCAL is selected -


for the LOCAL/REMOTE selec-
tion.

13 Inverter operation ready Closed when an Inverter fault is -


not detected, and operation is
ready.

14 Fault restart Closed during fault retries. -

15 UV Closed when undervoltage is de- -


tected.

16 Reverse run Closed during reverse run. -

17 Speed search Closed when Inverter conducts a -


speed search.

18 Data output from com- -


munications

19 PID feedback loss Closed during PID feedback loss 183

20 Frequency reference - -
loss

21 Inverter overheat alert - -


(OH3)

Factory Settings

No. Terminal Factory Setting


n057 MA (See note.) 2 (frequency agree)
n058 P1 1 (operating)
n059 P2 0 (fault)
Note: Terminal MA can be used only from DeviceNet communications. There
is no corresponding external output terminal.
165
• FREQUENCY AGREE Signal (setting=2)

Detection width Release width


±2 Hz ±4 Hz

Output frequency

FREQUENCY AGREE signal

166
7. Programming Features

„ Preventing the Motor from Stalling (Current


Limit)
This function automatically adjusts the output frequency and output cur-
rent according to the load to continue operation without stalling the
motor.
Stall Prevention (Current Limit) Level during Acceleration
(n093)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level during acceleration in units
of 1%. (Inverter rated current = 100%)
Factory setting: 170%
A setting of 200% disables the stall prevention (current limit) during
acceleration. If the output current exceeds the value set for n093 during
acceleration, acceleration stops and the frequency is maintained. When
the output current goes to the value set for n093, acceleration starts.
Motor current

n093 *1 *1: Stops the acceleration to prevent the motor


from stalling.
Time *2: Release width (hysteresis) of stall
Output
frequency prevention during accel is approx. 5% of
inverter rated current

Time
*1

167
In the constant output area (output frequency > Max. Voltage Output
Frequency (n013)), the stall prevention (current limit) level during
acceleration is automatically decreased using the following equa-
tion.
Stall prevention (current limit) level during
acceleration in constant output area

Stall prevention (current limit) Max. voltage output frequency (n013)


level during acceleration (n093) Output frequency

Stall prevention level Stall prevention level during


during acceleration acceleration (n093)
Stall prevention limit during
acceleration (40% of n093)

Output frequency
Maximum voltage
output frequency
n013

Stall Prevention (Current Limit) Level while Running (n094)


Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level while running in units of
1%. (Inverter rated current = 100%)
Factory setting: 160%
A setting of 200% disables stall prevention (current limit) while run-
ning.
If the stall prevention action current at speed agreement exceeds the
value set for n094 for longer than 100 ms, deceleration starts.
If the output current exceeds the value set for n094, deceleration contin-
ues. If the output current goes to the value set for n094, acceleration to
the set frequency starts.
Stall prevention acceleration/deceleration settings during operation are
set either for the currently selected Acceleration Time, i.e., for Acceler-

168
7. Programming Features

ation Time 1 (n019) and Deceleration Time 1 (n020), or for Accelera-


tion Time 2 (n021) and Deceleration Time 2 (n022).
Motor current
*1: Decreases frequency to prevent the motor
n094 from stalling.
*2 *2: At start of acceleration, the output current
Time hysterisis is approx. 5% of inverter rated
Output current.
frequency

100msec
Time
*1

† Stall Prevention during Operation


Stall Prevention Automatic Decrease Selection (n115)
The stall prevention level can be decreased automatically in the constant
output range.

Con- Name Unit Setting Factory


stant No. Range Setting

n115 Stall Prevention Automatic - 0=Disabled 0


Decrease Selection 1=Enabled

n115 Settings

Setting Function
0 The stall prevention level is the level set for constant n094
in all frequency areas.
1 The following figure shows how the stall prevention level is
automatically decreased in the constant output range
(Max. frequency > Max. voltage output frequency).
The lower limit is 40% of the set value of n094.
Constant output area
Operation level
Operation level
n094 Max. voltage output frequency n013
n094
Output frequency

Lower limit
40% of n094

n013 Output frequency

169
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection during Stall Pre-
vention (n116)
With this function, Acceleration Time 2 (n021) and Deceleration Time 2
(n022) can be fixed as the acceleration/deceleration time when moving
to prevent stalling during operation.

Con- Name Unit Setting Factory


stant No. Range Setting

n116 Acceleration/Deceleration - 0=Disabled 0


Time Selection during Stall 1=Enabled
Prevention

n116 Settings

Setting Function
0 Acceleration/deceleration time is set to Acceleration/
Deceleration Time 1 or 2.
1 Acceleration/deceleration time is fixed at Acceleration/
Deceleration Time 2 (n021, n022)

• Stall Prevention during Deceleration (n092)


To prevent overvoltage during deceleration, the Inverter automati-
cally extends the deceleration time according to the value of main
circuit DC voltage. When using an optional braking resistor, set
n092 to 1.

Controls the deceleration


time to prevent overvoltage
Setting Stall Prevention during fault.
Frequency

Deceleration
0 Provided
Time
Set
1 Not provided (with braking decel
resistor mounted) time

170
7. Programming Features

„ Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation


† Slip Compensation (n002 = 0)
As the load becomes larger, the motor speed is reduced and the motor
slip value is increased. The slip compensating function controls the
motor speed at a constant value even if the load varies.
When the Inverter output current is equal to the Motor Rated Current
(n036), the compensation frequency is added to the output frequency.
Compensation frequency = Motor rated slip (n106)
Output current − Motor no-load current (n110)
Motor rated current Motor no-load current (n110)
(n036)
Slip compensation gain (n111)

Related Constants

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting

n036 Motor Rated Current 0.1 A 0% to 150% of Inverter *


rated current

n111 Slip Compensation 0.1 0.0 to 2.5 0.0


Gain

n110 Motor No-load Current 1% 0% to 99% (100%=Mo- *


tor Rated Current n036)

n112 Slip Compensation 0.1 s 0.0 to 25.5 s 2.0 s


Time Constant When 0.0 s is set, delay
time is 2.0 s

n106 Motor Rated Slip 0.1 Hz 0.0 to 20 Hz *

* Depends on Inverter capacity.


Note: 1. Slip compensation is not performed under the following condition:
Output frequency < Minimum Output Frequency (n016)
2. Slip compensation is not performed during regeneration.
3. Slip compensation is not performed when the Motor Rated Current
(n036) is set to 0.0 A.

171
„ Motor Protection
† Motor Overload Detection
The Varispeed V7 protects against motor overload with a built-in elec-
tonic thermal overload relay.
Motor Rated Current (Electronic Thermal Reference Current,
n036)
Set the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate.
Note: Setting n036 to 0.0 A disables the motor overload protective function.

Motor Overload Protection Selection (n037, n038)

n037 Electronic Thermal Characteristics


Setting
0 For general-purpose motor
1 For Inverter motor
2 Electronic thermal overload protection not provided.

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting

n038 Electronic Thermal Mo- 1 min 1 to 60 min 8 min


tor Protection Time
Constant Setting

The electronic thermal overload function monitors the motor tempera-


ture based on Inverter output current and time to protect the motor from
overheating. When the electronic thermal overload relay is enabled, an
error occurs, and the Inverter output is turned OFF to prevent
excessive overheating in the motor. When operating with one Inverter
connected to one motor, an external thermal relay is not needed. When
operating more than one motor with one Inverter, install a thermal relay
on each motor.
General-purpose Motors and Inverter Motors
Induction motors are classified as general-purpose motors or Inverter
motors based on their cooling capabilities. The motor overoad function
operates differently for these two motor types.

172
7. Programming Features

Example for 200 V-Class Motors

Cooling Effect Torque Characteristics Electronic Ther-


mal Overload

Effective when An error


operated at 50/
60 S (motor overload
60 Hz from com- Short-Term
protection) oc-
ercial power
Continuous curs when contin-
supply. Torque
(%)
rating
uously operated
General-purpose Motor

at 50/60 Hz or
less at 100%
load.

Operation frequency (Hz)

Base Frequency 60 Hz
(V/f for 60-Hz, 220-V Input Voltage)

For low-speed operation, torque


must be limited in order to stop mo-
tor temperature rise.

Effective even Electronic ther-


when operated 60 S
mal overload pro-
at low speed Short-term tection is not
(approx. 6 Hz) Continuous
activated even for
Torque
(%)
rating continous opera-
tion at 50/60 Hz
or less at a 100%
load.
Inverter Motor

Operation frequency (Hz)

Base Frequency 60 Hz
(V/f for 60-Hz, 220-V Input Voltage)

Use an Inverter motor for continu-


ous operation at low speed.

173
„ Selecting Cooling Fan Operation
In order to increase the life of the cooling fan, the fan can be set to oper-
ate only when Inverter is running
n039 = 0 (Factory setting): Operates only when Inverter is running
(Continues operation for 1 minute after
Inverter is stopped.)
=1: Operates with power ON

„ Using Energy-saving Control Mode


Verify that the constant n002 is set to 0 (V/f control mode) when per-
forming energy-saving control. Set n139 to 1 to enable the energy-sav-
ing control function.
† Energy-saving Control Selection (n139)
Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory
No. Setting

n139 Energy-saving Control - 0: Disabled 0


Selection 1: Enabled
Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. However, if the
motor characteristics are different from a Yaskawa standard motor, refer
to the description below and change the constant setting accordingly.
Energy-saving Control Mode (n140, n158)
The voltage for the best motor efficiency is calculated when operating
in energy-saving control mode. The calculated voltage is used as the
output voltage reference. The factory setting is set to the max. applica-
ble motor capacity for a Yaskawa standard motor.
The greater the enegy-saving coefficient is, the greater the output volt-
age becomes.
When using a motor other than a Yaskawa standard motor, set the motor
code corresponding to the voltage and capacity in n158. Then, change
the setting of the energy-saving coefficient K2 (n140) by 5% to mini-
mize the output power.
When the motor code is set in n158, the energy-saving coefficient K2,
which corresponds to the motor code, must be set in n140.

174
7. Programming Features

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting

n140 Energy-saving Control - 0.0 to 6550 *


Coefficient K2

n158 Motor Code - 0 to 70 *


* Depends on Inverter capacity.
Energy-saving Voltage Lower/Upper Limits (n141, n142,
n159, n160)
Set the upper and lower limits of the output voltage. When the value
calculated in the energy-saving control mode is larger than the upper
limit (or smaller than the lower limit), the limit value is output as the
voltage reference. The upper limit is set to prevent over-excitation, and
the lower limit is set to prevent stalls when the load is light. The voltage
limit is set for machines using 6 or 60 Hz. For any value other than 6 or
60 Hz, set the voltage limit using linear interpolation. The constants are
set in % for 200-V/400-V Inverters.
Constant No. Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting

n141 Energy-saving Control Voltage % 0 to 120 50


Lower Limit at 60 Hz

n142 Energy-saving Control Voltage % 0 to 25 12


Lower Limit at 6 Hz

n159 Upper Voltage Limit For Energy- % 0 to 120 120


saving Control at 60 Hz

n160 Upper Voltage Limit For Energy- % 0 to 25 16


saving Control at 6 Hz

Voltage limit

250 V*

Upper limit

Lower limit

6 Hz 60 Hz Output frequency
* Doubled for the 400 V Class Inverters.
175
† Energy-saving Search Operation
In energy-saving control mode, the maximum applicable voltage is cal-
culated using the output power. However, a temperature change or the
use of another manufacturer’s motor will change the fixed constants,
and the maximum applicable voltage may not be emitted. In the search
operation, change the voltage slightly so that the maximum applicable
voltage can be obtained.
Search Operation Voltage Limit (n144)
Limits the range where the voltage is controlled. The constant is set in
% for 200-V/400-V Inverters. The search operation is not performed
when n144 is set to 0.

Constant No. Name Unit Setting Range Factory


Setting

n144 Search Operation Voltage Limit % 0 to 100 0

Search Operation Voltage Steps (n145, n146)


Constants n145 and n146 set the change in voltage for one cycle of the
search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the values as percent-
ages of 200 V. For 400 V Class Inverters, set the values as percentages
of 400 V. Increase the value and the changes in the rotation speed will
also increase.
For 200 V Class Inverters, the range of the change in voltage is deter-
mined from the 100% and 5% settings for 200 V. For 400 V Class
Inverters, the range of the change in voltage is determined from the
100% and 5% settings for 400 V. The values calculated by linear inter-
polation are used for voltages other than these.

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting

n145 Search Operation Voltage Step at % 0.1 to 10.0 0.5


100%

n146 Search Operation Voltage Step at % 0.1 to 10.0 0.2


5%

n143 Power Average Time ×24 ms 1 to 200 1 (24 ms)

176
7. Programming Features

Voltage fluctuation

Output voltage

Search Operation Power Detection Hold Width (n161)


When the power fluctuation is less than this value, the output voltage is
held for 3 seconds, and then, the search operating mode is started. Set
the hold width as a percentage of the power that is currently held.

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n161 Search Operation % 0 to 100 10
Power Detection Hold
Width

Time Constant of Power Detection Filter (n162)


Response at load changes is improved when this value is small.
At low frequency, however, unstable rotation will result.

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n162 Time Constant of Power ×4 0 to 255 5
Detection Filter ms (20 ms)

177
† Motor Code
The Energy-saving Coefficient K2 (n140) is set to a value that corre-
sponds to the Motor Code (n158).

Motor Type Voltage Class Capacity Motor Code: Energy-saving


n158 Coefficient K2:
n140

Yaskawa 200 V 0.1 kW 0 481.7


General-pur-
pose Motor 0.2 kW 1 356.9

0.4 kW 2 288.2

0.75 kW 3 223.7

1.5 kW 4 169.4

2.2 kW 5 156.8

3.7 kW 7 122.9

5.5 kW 9 94.8

7.5 kW 10 72.7

400 V 0.2 kW 21 713.8

0.4 kW 22 576.4

0.75 kW 23 447.4

1.5 kW 24 338.8

2.2 kW 25 313.6

3.0 kW 26 245.8

3.7 kW 27 245.8

5.5 kW 29 189.5

7.5 kW 30 145.4

178
7. Programming Features

Motor Type Voltage Class Capacity Motor Code: Energy-saving


n158 Coefficient K2:
n140

Yaskawa 200 V 0.1 kW 40 481.7


Inverter Motor
0.2 kW 41 356.9

0.4 kW 42 300.9

0.75 kW 43 224.7

1.5 kW 44 160.4

2.2 kW 45 138.9

3.7 kW 47 106.9

5.5 kW 49 84.1

7.5 kW 50 71.1

400 V 0.2 kW 61 713.8

0.4 kW 62 601.8

0.75 kW 63 449.4

1.5 kW 64 320.8

2.2 kW 65 277.8

3.0 kW 66 213.8

3.7 kW 67 213.8

5.5 kW 69 168.3

7.5 kW 70 143.3

„ Using PID Control Mode


For details on the PID control settings, refer to the block diagram of the
Inverter’s internal PID control or the block diagram of the Operator ana-
log speed reference.

† PID Control Selection (n128)

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n128 PID Control Selection − 0 to 8 0

179
Setting Function PID Output
Characteristics
0 Disabled. -
1 Enabled: Deviation is subject to derivative control. Forward
2 Enabled: Feedback signal is subject to derivative Forward
control.
3 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and
deviation are subject to derivative control.
4 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and
feedback signal are subject to derivative control.
5 Enabled: Deviation is subject to derivative control. Reverse
6 Enabled: Feedback signal is subject to derivative
control.
7 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and
deviation are subject to derivative control.
8 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and
feedback signal are subject to derivative control.
Set one of the above values when using PID control.
The following table shows how to determine the target value and the
feedback value to be input when PID control is enabled.

Input Condition

Target The currently selected Determined by the Frequency Refer-


Value frequency reference ence Selection (n004).
When local mode is selected, the target
value is determined by the Frequency
Reference Selection In Local Mode
(n008).
When multi-step references are select-
ed, the currently selected frequency ref-
erence will be the target value.

Feedback The frequency refer- -


Value ence that is set in the
PID Feedback Value
Selection (n164)

n164 Setting Description

0 Not used.

1 Not used.

2 Not used.

180
7. Programming Features

n164 Setting Description

3 Operator terminal: Voltage 0 to 10 V

4 Operator terminal: Current 4 to 20 mA


Note: When using an analog signal (0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA) input to the CN2
terminal of the JVOP-140 Digital Operator as the target or feedback
value of PID control, do not use it as a multi-analog input. Constant
n077 (Multi-function Analog Input Function) must be set to 0 (disabled
in this case).
Proportional Gain (P), Integral Time (I), Derivative Time (D)
(n130, n131, n132)
Adjust the response of the PID control with the proportional gain (P),
integral time (I), and derivative time (D).

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n130 Proportional Gain (P) Multi- 0.0 to 25.0 1.0
ples
n131 Integral Time (I) 1.0 s 0.0 to 360.0 1.0
n132 Derivative Time (D) 1.0 s 0.00 to 2.50 0.00
Optimize the responsiveness by adjusting the constants while operat-
ing an actual load (machanical system). Any control (P, I, or D) that
is set to zero (0.0, 0.00) will not operate.

Upper Limit of Integral (I) Values (n134)


Constant Name Unit Setting Factory
No. Range Setting
n134 Upper Limit of Integral % 0 to 100 100
Values
Constant n134 prevents the calculated value of integral control from
exceeding a specific amount. There is normally no need to change the
setting.
Reduce the setting if there is a risk of load damage, or of the motor
going out of step by the Inverter’s response when the load suddenly
changes. If the setting is reduced too much, the target value and the
feedback value will not match.
Set this constant as a percentage of the maximum output frequency with
the maximum frequency as 100%.

181
PID Offset Adjustment (n133)

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n133 PID Offset Adjustment % -100 to 100 0
Constant n133 adjusts the PID control offset.
If both the target value and the feedback values are zero, adjust n133 so
that the Inverter output frequency is zero.

Primary Delay Time Constant for PID Output (n135)

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n135 Primary Delay Time 0.1 s 0.0 to 10.0 0.0
Constant for PID Output
Constant n135 is the low-pass filter setting for PID control outputs.
There is normally no need to change the setting.
If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high or if the rigidity
is low causing the mechanical system to resonate, increase the setting so
that it is higher than the resonance frequency period.

PID Output Gain (n163)

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n163 PID Output Gain Multi- 0.0 to 25.0 1.0
ples
Constant n163 adjusts the output gain.

PID Feedback Gain (n129)

Constant Name Unit Setting Factory


No. Range Setting
n129 PID Feedback Gain Multi- 0.00 to 10.00 1.00
ples
Constant n129 is the gain that adjusts the feedback value.

182
7. Programming Features

PID Feedback Loss Detection (n136, n137, n138)

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting
n136 Selection for PID - 0: No detection 0
Feedback Loss of PID feed-
Detection back loss
1: Detection of
PID feed-
back loss,
operation
continued:
FbL alarm
2: Detection of
PID feed-
back loss,
output turned
OFF: Fault
n137 PID Feedback % 0 to 100 0
Loss Detection 100% = Max.
Level output frequen-
cy
n138 PID Feedback % 0.0 to 25.5 1.0
Loss Detection
Time
PID Limit
Sets the limit after PID control as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency.
Prohibition of PID Output
Zero limit occurs when the PID output is negative.

183
184
PID Control Block Diagram
Frequency reference n004
selection
Remote/Local Frequency reference
Transmission/ selection from DeviceNet n128=0 or PID cancel by a
Control circuit NetRef multi-function input
Operator potentiometer terminal switch 0: Remote/Local
0: Remote/Local 1: DeviceNet n128 = 3, 4, 7, 8
Multi-step speed reference
FREF1(n024) 1: DeviceNet
0 Others 110%
DeviceNet 0 Others +
communications
Output frequency
n128=1, 2, 5, 6 PID +
Operator (0 to 10 V) control selection 0%

Operator (4 to 20 mA)
PID output value
PID INPUT MNTR (U-18)
MNTR (U-17) 100%/FMAX
n008 100%/FMAX
1 DeviceNet
Operator potentiometer
transmission
1 DeviceNet
FREF1(n024)
transmission 200%
FREF2(n025)
FREF3(n026) Z -1
FREF4(n027) Integral limit from Integral upper PID primary delay time -200%
FREF5(n028) multi-function input limit constant compensation PID control selection
FREF6(n029) 100% with reminder n128=1, 2, 3, 4
n134
FREF7(n030) + +
×1
+
+ 1 + 1 + n163
FREF8(n031) - n132 +
n131 + + + - n135 +
FREF9(n120) -100%
× -1 PID output gain
Proportional - n134
FREF10(n121) gain n128
Integral Z -1 n133
FREF11(n122) time (I) = 5, 6, 7, 8
Z -1 PID offset adjustment
FREF12(n123) Compensation Integral limit from
FREF13(n124) with reminder +
n128 = 1, 3, 5, 7 multi-function input
FREF14(n125) n132
-
FREF15(n126) PID control selection
Z -1 Differential
FREF16(n127) n128=2, 4, 6, 8
time (D)
FJOG(n032)

Feedback value
MNTR (U-16)
100%/FMAX

PID control
n164 selection Notes: Z-1 cannot be cleared during operation command input. Z-1
Operator (0 to 10 V) 100% n128=1, 3, 5, 7 can be cleared during stop command input, or during PID
n129
Operator (4 to 20 mA) cancel by the multi-function input.
Adjustment + +
n132 +
gain -
Z -1 n128 = 2, 4, 6, 8
Derivative time (D)
Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram
Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram

Digital Operator Inverter


(JVOP-140)
RS232C MEMOBUS communications n068≥0
(9600 bps) Max. output frequency
0 to 10 V 110%
VIN A/D n011 1
Pin 1 conversion ADCH1 n068 Fref
3FFH n070
of CN2 Gain
Converts A/D (value) Primary delay n068<0
0%
into Hz time constant

Z-1
Compensation with n069 n011
reminder Bias Max. output frequency

RS232C MEMOBUS communications n071≥0


(9600 bps) Max. output frequency
4 to 20 mA 110%
IIN A/D n011 1
conversion ADCH2 n071 Fref
Pin 2 3FFH n073
of CN2 Gain n071<0
Converts A/D (value) Primary delay
0%
into Hz time constant
-1
Z n011
n072
With compensation
A/D converter GND Bias Max. output frequency
GND
Pin 3
of CN2 0V
7. Programming Features

185
„ Using Constant Copy Function
† Constant Copy Function
The Varispeed V7 standard JVOP-140 Digital Operator can store con-
stants for one Inverter. A backup power supply is not necessary because
EEPROM is used.
The constant copy function is possible only for the Inverters with the
same product series, power supply specifications, and control mode (V/
f control or vector control). However, some constants may not be cop-
ied. It is also impossible to copy constants between Varispeed V7 and
VSmini J7 Inverters.
Prohibiting reading constants from the Inverter can be set in n177. The
constant data cannot be changed when this constant is set.
If an alarm occurs when copying constants, PRGM will flash and copy-
ing will continue.
Constant Copy Function Selection (n176)
Depending on the setting of n176 (Constant Copy Function Selection),
the following functions can be used.
1. Reading all the constants from the Inverter (READ) and storing
them in EEPROM in the Digital Operator
2. Copying the constants stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter
(COPY)
3. Verifying that the constants in the Digital Operator and the constants
in the Inverter are the same (VERIFY)
4. Displaying the maximum applicable motor capacity and the voltage
class of the Inverter for which constants are stored in the Digital
Operator
5. Displaying the software number of the Inverter for which constants
are stored in the Digital Operator

186
7. Programming Features

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting
n176 Constant - rdy: READY rdy
Copy Func- rEd: READ
tion Selection CPy: COPY
vFy: VERIFY
vA: Inverter capacity
display
Sno: Software No. dis-
play

Prohibiting Constant Read Selection (n177)


Select this function to prevent accidentally overwriting the constants
stored in EEPROM or in the Digital Operator. Reading is not possible
when this constant is set to 0.
The constant data stored in the Digital Operator are safe from accidental
overwriting.
If reading is attempted while this constant is set to 0, PrE will flash.
Press DSPL or ENTER and return to the constant No. display.

Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory


No. Setting
n177 Constant 1 0: READ prohibited 0
Read Selec- 1: READ allowed
tion Prohibit

187
† READ Function
Reads out the constants in batch from the Inverter and stores them in
EEPROM inside the Digital Operator. When the read-out is executed,
the previously stored constants data in the EEPROM are cleared and
replaced with the newly entered constants.
Example: Storing Constants from Inverter in EEPROM in Operator.
Explanation Operator Display

• Enable the setting of • Press DSPL to light


constants n001 to [PRGM].
n179. • Press ENTER to display (May be a different constant No.)
the set value. (Lit)
• Change the set value to 4 (May be a different set value.)
by pressing the or (Blinks)
key.
• Press ENTER. (Lit for one second.)
• Set Contant Read
Prohibited Selection (The constant is displayed.)
• Change the constant No.
(n177) to read-
to n177 by pressing the
enabled. *1
or key.
• Press ENTER to display
the set value. (Lit)
• Change the set value to 1
by pressing the or (Blinks)
key.
• Press ENTER. (Lit for one second.)

(The constant is displayed.)

• Execute read-out
(READ) using the
Constant Copy • Change the constant No. (Lit)
Function Selection by pressing the or
(n176).
key. (Lit)
• Press ENTER to display
the set value.
• Change the set value to (Flashes while executing
rEd by pressing the or the read)
key.
• Press ENTER. (End is displayed after the
read has been completed.)
(The constant is
displayed.)
• Press DSPL or ENTER.
• Set Constant Read
Prohibited Selection
(n177) to read-dis- • Change the constant No.
abled.*2 to N177 by pressing the (Lit)
or key.
• Press ENTER to display (Flashes)
the set value.
• Change the set value to 0
(Lit for one second.)
by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER. (The constant No. is
displayed.)

Note: 1. When reading is enabled (n177=1), this setting is not necessary.

188
7. Programming Features

2. This setting is not necessary unless read-prohibition is selected.


† COPY Function
This function writes the constants stored inside the Digital Operator in
batch to the Inverter. Write-in is possible only for Inverters with the
same product series, power supply specifications, and control mode (V/
f control or vector control).
Therefore, writing from 200 V Class to 400 V Class Inverters (or vice
versa), from V/f control mode to vector control mode Inverters (or vice
versa), or from Varispeed V7 to VSmini J7 Inverters is not possible.
The Constant Copy Function Selection (n176), Constant Read Selection
Prohibit (n177), Fault History (n178), Software Version No. (n179), and
hold output frequency are not written. vAE will appear (flashing) if the
capacities of the Inverters differ.
Press ENTER to continue writing (the COPY function).
Press STOP/RESET to stop the COPY function.
The following constants are not written if the Inverter capacities differ.

Constant No. Name Constant No. Name

n011 to n017 V/f Settings n108 Motor Leakage In-


ductance

n036 Motor Rated Current n109 Torque Compensa-


tion Voltage Limiter

n080 Carrier Frequency n110 Motor No-load Cur-


Selection rent

n105 Torque Compensa- n140 Energy-saving Coef-


tion Iron Loss ficient K2

n106 Motor Rated Slip n158 Motor Code

n107 Line to Neutral (per


Phase)

189
Example: Writing Constants from EEPROM in Operator to Inverter
Explanation Operator Display

• Enable the settings for • Press DSPL to light


constants n001 to [PRGM]. (May be a different constant No.)
n179. • Press ENTER to dis-
play the set value. (Lit)
• Change the set value (May be a different set value.)
to 4 by pressing the (Flashes)
or key.
• Press ENTER. (Lit for one second.)
• Execute write-in
(COPY) using the (The constant is
• Change the constant displayed.)
Constant Copy Func- No. to n176 by press-
tion Selection (n176).
ing the or key.
• Press ENTER to dis-
play the set value. (Lit)
• Change the set value
to CPy by pressing the (Lit)
or key.
• Press ENTER. (Flashes while executing the
copy.)
• Press DSPL or
ENTER (End is displayed after the
copy has been completed.)
(The constant No. is
displayed.)

A setting range check and matching check for the written constants are
executed after the constants are written from the Digital Operator to the
Inverter. If a constant error is found, the written constants are discarded
and the constants stored before writing are restored.
When a setting range error is found, the constant No. where an error
occurs is indicated by flashing.
When an inconsistency in the settings is found, (†: a number)
is indicated by flashing.
† VERIFY Function
This function compares the constants stored in the Digital Operator with
the constant in the Inverter. Verification is possible only for the Invert-
ers with same product series, power supply specifications, and control
mode (V/f control or vector control).
When the constants stored in the Digital Operator are the same as those
in the Inverter, vFy will flash, and then End will be displayed.

190
7. Programming Features

Example: Comparing Constants Stored in EEPROM in Operator with


Constants in Inverter

Explanation Operator Display

• Enable the settings • Press DSPL to light


for constants n001 [PRGM] (May be a different constant No.)
to n179. • Press ENTER to display the (Lit)
set value.
• Change the set value to 4 (May be a different constant No.)
by pressing the or (Flashes)
key.
• Press ENTER. (Lit for one second.)

(The constant No. is


displayed.)

• Excute VERIFY by • Change the constant No. to


Constant Copy
Function Selection n176 by pressing the or (Lit)
(n176). key.
• Press ENTER to display the (Lit)
set value.
• Change the set value to vFy
by pressing the or (Flashes while executing
VERIFY)
key.
• Press ENTER.
• Display the (Flashes) (When n011 is
unmatched con- different.)
stant No.
• Display the con-
stant value in the
Inverter. (Flashes)
• Display the con- • Press ENTER.
stant value in the (Flashes)
Digital Operator.
• Continue the exe- • Press ENTER.
cution of VERIFY. (Flashes while executing
the verification)
• Press the key.
• Press DSPL or ENTER.
(End is displayed when the
verification has been completed.)
(The constant No. is
displayed.)

While a constant No. that is not the same is displayed or a constant


value is displayed, press STOP/RESET to interrupt the execution of the
verification. End will be displayed. Press DSPL or ENTER to return to
the constant No.

191
† Inverter Capacity Display
The voltage class and maximum applicable motor capacity for which
constants are stored in the Digital Operator are displayed.
Example: Displaying Voltage Class and Maximum Applicable Motor
Capacity for Inverter whose Constants are in EEPROM in Operator
Explanation Operator Display

• Enable the setting for • Press DSPL to light


constants n001 to [PRGM]. (May be a different constant No.)
n179. • Press ENTER to display the (Lit)
set value.
• Change the set value to 4 by (May be a different constant No.)
pressing the or key. (Flashes)
• Press ENTER.
(Lit for one second.)

(The constant No. is


displayed.)

• Change the constant No. to


• Execute Inverter
Capacity Display (vA) n176 by pressing the or
using the Constant key. (Lit)
Copy Function Selec- • Press ENTER to display the
tion (n176). set value.
• Change the set value to vA (Lit)
fy by pressing the or
key. (Lit) (For 20P7)*
• Press ENTER.
• Press DSPL or ENTER. (The constant No. is
displayed.)

192
7. Programming Features

The following figure shows the Inverter Capacity Display

Voltage Class
2 Three-phase 200 V
b Single-phase 200 V
4 Three-phase 400 V

Max. Applicable Motor Capacity


200 V Class 400 V Class
0.1 0.1 kW
0.2 0.25 kW 0.37 kW
0.4 0.55 kW 0.55 kW
0.7 1.1 kW 1.1 kW
1.5 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
2.2 2.2 kW 2.2 kW
3.0 3.0 kW
3.7 3.7 kW 3.7 kW
5.5 5.5 kW 5.5 kW
7.5 7.5 kW 7.5 kW

193
† Software No. Display
The software number of the Inverter for which constants are stored in
the Digital Operator is displayed.
Example: Displaying Software No. of Inverter for which Constants Are
Stored in EEPROM in Operator
Explanation Operator Display

• Enable the setting for • Press DSPL to light


constants n001 to [PRGM].
n179. • Press ENTER to display (May be a different constant No.)
the set value. (Lit)
• Change the set value to 4 (May be a different set value.)
by pressing the or (Flashes)
key.
• Press ENTER. (Lit for one second.)

(The constant No. is


displayed.)

• Execute Software No. • Change the constant No. to


Display (Sno)* using
the Constant Copy n176 by pressing the or (Lit)
Function Selection key.
(n176). • Press ENTER to display (Lit)
the set value.
• Change the set value to
Sno by pressing the or (Lit)
(Software version: VSP030010)
key.
• Press ENTER. (The constant No. is
• Press DSPL or ENTER. displayed.)

* Displays the lower 4 digits of the software version.


† Display List
Operator Description Corrective Action
Display

Lit: Constant copy function selection -


enabled.

Lit: READ selected. -


Flashes: READ under execution.

Lit: Writing (COPY) selected. -


Flashes: Writing (COPY) under execu-
tion.

Lit: VERIFY selected. -


Flashes: VERIFY under execution.

Lit: Inverter capacity display selected. -

Lit: Software No. display selected. -

194
7. Programming Features

Operator Description Corrective Action


Display

Lit: READ, COPY (writing), VERIFY -


completed.

Flashes: Attempt made to execute Confirm the necessity to execute


READ while Constant Read Selection READ, then set Constant Read Selec-
Prohibit (n177) is set to 0. tion Prohibit (n177) to 1 to execute
READ.

Flashes: The constant could not be Confirm that the main circuit power
read properly for READ operation. Or, supply voltage is correct, then re-exe-
a main circuit low voltage is detected cute READ.
during READ operation.

Flashes: A checksum error occurred in The constants stored in the Digital Op-
the constant data stored in the Digital erator cannot be used.
Operator. Re-execute READ to store the con-
stans in the Digital Operator.

Flashes: The password for the con- Check if the Inverters are the same
nected Inverter and that for the con- product series.
stant data stored in the Digital
Operator disagree. Example: Writing
(COPY) from Varispeed V7 to VSmini
J7

Flashes: No constant data stored in Execute READ.


the Digital Operator.

Flashes: Attempt made to execute Check each voltage class and control
writing (COPY) or VERIFY between mode.
different voltage classes or different
control modes.

Flashes: A main circuit low voltage Confirm that the main circuit power
was detected during writing (COPY) supply voltage is correct, then re-exe-
operation. cute writing (COPY).

Lit: A checksum error occurred in the Initialize the constants. If an error oc-
constant data stored in the Inverter. curs again, replace the Inverter due to
a failure of constant memory element
(EEPROM) in the Inverter.

Flashes: Attempt made to execute Press ENTER to continue the execu-


COPY or VERIFY between different tion of COPY or VERIFY. Press STOP
Inverters of different capacities. to interrupt the execution of COPY or
VERIFY.

Flashes: A communications error oc- Check the connection between the In-
curred between the Inverter and the verter and Digital Operator.
Digital Operator. If a communications error occurs dur-
ing the READ operation or writing
(COPY) operation, always re-execute
the READ or COPY.

Note: While rEd, CPy, or vFy is flashing, key input on the Digital Operator is
disabled. While rEd, CPy and vFy are not flashing, pressing DSPL or
ENTER redisplays the constant No.

195
„ Unit Selection for Frequency Reference Setting/
Display
Constants and Monitor Displays for Which Selection of Unit
Function Is Valid

Item Contents
Frequency ref- Frequency References 1 to 8 (Constants n024
erence con- to n031)
stants
Jog Frequency Reference (Constant n032)
Frequency References 9 to 16 (Constants
n120 to n127)
Monitor display Frequency Reference Display (FREF)
Output Frequency Display (FOUT)
Frequency Reference Display (U-01)
Output Frequency Display (U-02)

Setting/Displaying Unit Selection for Frequency Reference


(n035)
The frequency reference, output frequency, and the numeric data of fre-
quency reference constants can be displayed in %, r/min, or m/min
according to the set value of constant n035.
With DeviceNet communications, set the number of motor poles and
display the frequency reference constant in r/min.

Constant Constant Name Description Factory


No. Setting
035 Setting/Display- 0: Units of 0.01 Hz (less 4
ing Unit Selec- than 100 Hz) 0.1 Hz
tion for (100 Hz and more)
Frequency Ref- 1: Units of r/min (set the
erence number of motor poles)
40 to 3999: Any unit

196
7. Programming Features

n035 Settings

Setting Description
0 • Setting unit: 0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (100
Hz and more)
• Setting range
min {Fmax (n011) × Frequency Reference Lower Limit
(n034) to Fmax (n011) × Frequency Reference Upper
Limit (n033), 400 Hz}
1 • Setting in units of 0.1%: 100.0%/Fmax (n011)
• Setting range
Min. {Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) to Fre-
quency Reference Upper Limit (n033), (400 Hz ÷
Fmax. (n011)) 100%}
Max. Upper Limit Value: Fmax. (n011) × Set value (%)
≤ 400 Hz
2 to 39 • Setting in units of 1 r/min: r/min=120 × Frequency ref-
erence (Hz) ÷ n035 (Set the number of motor poles in
n035)
• Setting range
Min. {120 (Fmax (n011) Frequency Reference Lower
Limit (n034) ÷ n035 to 120 × (Fmax (n011) × Fre-
quency Reference Upper Limit (n033)) n035, 400 Hz ×
120 P, 9999r/min
• Max. Upper Limit Value: N × P ÷ 120 ≤ 400 Hz
40 to • Set the display value at 100% of frequency reference
3999 (set value of Fmax (n011)) at 1st to 4th digits of n035.
In the 4th digit of n035, set the position of decimal
point.
In the 1st to 4th digits of n035, set a 3-digit figure
excluding the decimal point.
4th digit Position of decimal point
0 † † †
1 † †. †
2 †. † †
3 0. † † †
Example: To display 20.0 at 100% of frequency refer-
ence, set n035 to 1200.
• Setting range
Min. {Lower 3-digits of n035) × Frequency Reference
Lower Limit (n034) to (Lower 3-digits of n035) × Fre-
quency Reference Upper Limit (n033), 400 Hz (Lower
3-digits of n035) × Fmax (n011), 999}
Max. Upper Limit Value: (Set value ÷ (Lower 3 digits of
n035)) × Fmax(011) ≤ 400 Hz
Note: 1. The frequency reference constants and monitor display data for
197
which this selection of the unit is valid are stored in the Inverter in
units of Hz.
The units are converted as shown below:
The initial value is 4.
Setting/Display Constant n035 Frequency reference constants
Data for monitor display

Display
Each unit
Units of Hz
system
Setting

2. The upper limit for each unit is the value with decimal places below
the significant digits truncated.
Example: Where the upper limit for the unit Hz is as follows for
60.00 Hz and n035 = 39:
120 × 60.00 Hz ÷ 39 = 184.9, thus 184 r/min is displayed as the upper
limit.
For displays other than for the upper limit, the decimal places below
the significant digits are rounded off.
3. When verifying constants for the copy function, frequency reference
constants (units of Hz) are used.

„ Selecting Processing for Frequency Reference


Loss (n064)
Use this setting to select the processing performed if the level of the fre-
quency reference signal from the operator circuit terminals suddenly
drops.

n064 Description
Setting
0 Processing for frequency reference loss disabled.
1* Processing for frequency reference loss enabled.

* Detected in REMOTE mode (drive mode) when analog reference (except


potentiometer on Digital Operator) or pulse train reference is selected in the
Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
Processing Method When 1 is Selected
If the level of the frequency reference signal drops by 90 % within 400
ms, operation continues at 80 % of the signal level before the level drop.

198
7. Programming Features

„ Input/Output Open-phase Detection


Constant Name Unit Setting Range Factory
No. Setting
n166 Input 1% 0 to 100 %*1 0%
Open-phase 400.0 V/100 %
Detection Level (200 V Class)
800.0 V/100 %
(400 V Class)
n167 Input 1s 0 to 255 s*2 0s
Open-phase
Detection Time
n168 Output 1% 0 to 100 %*1 0%
Open-phase Inveter’s rated output cur-
Detection Level rent/100 %
n169 Output 0.1 s 0.0 to 2.0 s*2 0.0 s
Open-phase
Detection Time

* 1. Not detected when set to 0 %.


* 2. Not detected when set to 0.0 s.
The recommended settings for input open-phase detection are
n166=7 % and n167=10 s.
(Open-phase cannot be detected correctly depending on the load status.)
The recommended settings for output open-phase detection are
n168=5 % and n169=0.2 s.

199
„ Undertorque Detection
An alarm signal can be output to a multi-function output terminal (P1 or
P2) when the load on the machine side suddenly becomes lighter (i.e.,
when an undertorque occurs).
To output an undertorque detection signal, set the output terminal funci-
ton selection in n057, n058, or n059 to 8 (undertorque detected, NO
contact) or 9 (undertorque detected, NC contact).
Motor Current

n118

Time
Multi-function Output
Terminal (Undertorque
ON ON
Detection Signal)
P1, P2 n119 n119
* Undertorque detection release width (hysteresis) is set at approx. 5 % of the
Inverter’s rated current.
Undertorque Detection Function Selection (n177)

Setting Description
0 Undertorque detection not provided.
1 Detected during constant-speed running. Operation continues
after detection.
2 Detected during constant-speed running. Operation stops.
3 Detected during running. Operation continues after detection.
4 Detected during running. Operation stops.
1. To detect undertorques during acceleration, set to 3 or 4.
2. To continue operation after undertorque detection, set to 1 or 3. Dur-
ing detection, the operation displays the “UL3” alarm (flashing).
3. To halt the Inverter by a fault at undertorque detection, set to 2 or 4.
At detection, the Operation displays the “UL3” fault (continuously
lit).

200
7. Programming Features

Undertorque Detection Level (n118)


Sets the undertorque detection current level in units of 1 %. (Inverter
rated current=100 %) When detected by torque is selected, motor rated
torque becomes 100 %.
Factory setting=10 %
Undertorque Detection Time (n119)
If the time for which the motor current is less than the undertorque
detection level (n118) is longer than the undertorque detection time
(n119), the undertorque detection function operates.
Factory setting=0.1 s
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
(n097)
When vector control mode is selected, it is possible to select whether
overtorque/undertorque detection is performed by output current or out-
put torque.
When V/f control mode is selected, the n097 setting becomes invalid,
and overtorque/undertorque is detected by output current.

Setting Description
0 Overtorque/undertorque detected by output torque.
1 Overtorque/undertorque detected by output current.

201
8. Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING • Never touch high-voltage terminals on the Inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electrical shock.
• Disconnect all power before performing mainte-
nance or inspection, and then wait at least one
minute after the power supply is disconnected. Con-
firm that all indicators are OFF before proceeding.
If the indicators are not OFF, the capacitors are still
charged and can be dangerous.
• Do not perform withstand voltage test on any part of
the Varispeed V7.
The Inverter is an electronic device that uses semi-
conductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
• Only authorized personnel should be permitted to
perform maintenance, inspection, or parts replace-
ment.
(Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.)
before starting work.)
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical
shock.)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in an
electric shock.

• The control PCB employs CMOS ICs.


CAUTION
Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, connectors, or
the cooling fan while power is applied to the circuit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.

202
8. Maintenance and Inspection

„ Periodic Inspection
Periodically inspect the Inverter as described in the following table to
prevent accidents and to ensure high performance with high reliability.

Location to Check for Solution


Check
Terminals, Invert- Improper seating or Properly seat and
er mounting loose connections in tighten hardware.
screws, etc. hardware.
Heatsinks Buildup of dust, dirt, Blow with dry com-
and debris pressed air at a pres-
sure of 39.2 × 104 to
58.8 × 104 Pa, 57 to
85 psi (4 to 6kg/cm2).
Printed circuit Accumulation of con- Blow with dry com-
boards ductive material or oil pressed air at a pres-
mist sure of 39.2 × 104 to
58.8 × 104 Pa, 57 to
85 psi (4 to 6kg/cm2).
If dust or oil cannot be
removed, replace the
Inverter.
Power elements Abnormal odor or dis- Replace the Inverter.
and smoothing coloration
capacitor
Cooling fan Abnormal noise or vi- Replace the cooling
bration fan.
Cumulative operation
time exceeding
20,000 hours

203
„ Part Replacement
Inverter’s maintenance periods are given below. Keep them as guide-
lines.
Part Replacement Guidelines

Part Standard Replacement Replacement Method


Period

Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.

Smoothing capacitor 5 years Replace with new part.


(Determine need by in-
spection.)

Breaker relays - Determine need by in-


spection.

Fuses 10 years Replace with new part.

Aluminum capaci- 5 years Replace board. (Deter-


tors on PCBs mine need by inspection.)
Note: Usage conditions are as follows:
• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30°C
• Load factor: 80% max.
• Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day

204
8. Maintenance and Inspection

† Replacement of Cooling Fan


Inverters with Width of 68 mm (2.68 inches), 140 mm (5.51
inches), or 170 mm (6.69 inches)
1. Removal
1. Press the right and left catches
on the fan cover in direction 1,
and then pull them in direction
2 to remove the fan cover from
the Inverter.
2. Pull the wiring in direction 3
from the fan cover rear face,
and remove the protective tube 1
and connector. 1

3. Open the left and right sides of 2


the fan cover to remove the 1
cooling fan from the cover. 1
2. Mounting
1. Mount the cooling fan on the
fan cover. The arrow mark to
indicate the airflow direction 3
of the cooling fan must be on
the opposite side to the cover.
Airflow direction
2. Connect the connector and
mount the protective tube
firmly. Mount the connector
joint section on the fan cover
rear face.
3. Mount the fan cover on the
Inverter. Always mount the
right and left catches on the
fan cover on the heatsinks.

205
Inverters with Width of 108 mm (4.25 inches)
1. Removal
1. Remove the front cover and
terminal cover, and then
remove the cooling fan con-
nector (CN10).
2. Press the right and left catches
on the fan cover in direction 1,
and pull the fan cover in direc- Cooling
tion 2 to remove it from the fan wire
Inverter. Pull out the wiring
from the cable lead-in hole at
the bottom of the plastic case.
3. Open the right and left sides of
the fan cover to remove the
cover from the cooling fan. 1

2. Mounting 2
1
1. Mount the cooling fan on the
fan cover. The arrow mark to
indicate the airflow direction Airflow direction
must be opposite to the cover.
2. Mount the fan cover on the
Inverter. Always mount the
right and left catches on the
fan cover on the heatsinks.
Thread in the wiring from the
cable lead-in hole at the bot-
tom of the plastic case to the
inside of the Inverter.
3. Connect the wiring to the
cooling fan connector (CN10)
and mount the front cover and
the terminal cover.

206
9. Fault Diagnosis

9. Fault Diagnosis
„ Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm and fault displays, the fault conditions,
and the corrective actions to be taken if the Varispeed V7 malfunctions.
Inverter alarms are classified into alarm display and fault display.
Alarm display:When a minor fault occurs in the Inverter, the Digital
Operator flashes the display. In this case, the operation
is continued, and restored automatically as soon as the
cause is removed. Multi-function output can output the
minor fault status to external devices.
Fault display: When a major fault occurs in the Inverter, the protective
function operates, and the Digital Operator lights the dis-
play and shuts off the output to stop the Inverter. The
fault can be output as a fault output to the external
devices by multi-function output.
To reset the fault, turn ON the reset signal with the run command OFF
or cycle the power after taking the corrective action.
* Selecting "always ON" mode at fan operation selection, the power
must be cycled to release the alarm display.

† Corrective Actions of Models with Blank Cover


1. Input fault reset or cycle the power supply OFF and ON.
2. When a fault cannot be corrected:
(1) Turn the power supply OFF and check the wiring and external circuit
(sequence).
(2) Turn the power supply OFF and replacce the blank cover with the
Digital Operator to display faults. The faults are displayes after turn-
ing the power ON.

207
† Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator
: ON : Flashing : OFF
Alarm Displays and Meaning
Alarm Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-
Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Detected as UV (Main circuit low volt- Check the following:


an alarm age) • Power supply volt-
only. Fault Main circuit DC voltage age
contact out- dropped below the low- • Main circuit power
put is not ac- voltage detection level supply connection.
tivated. while the Inverter output • Terminal screws:
is OFF. Loose?
200 V:Main circuit DC
voltage drops be-
low approx. 200 V
(160 V for single-
Flashing phase)
400 V:Main circuit DC
voltage dropped
below approx.
400 V.
(Control supply fault)
Control power supply
fault is detected while
the Inverter output is
OFF.

OV (Main circuit Check the power supply


overvoltage) voltage.
Main circuit DC voltage
exceeded the
overvoltage detection
level while the Inverter
Flashing output is OFF. Detection
level
200 V Class:
approx 410 V or more
400 V Class:
approx 820 V or more

OH (Heatsink overheat) Check the intake air tem-


Intake air temperature in- perature.
creased while the Invert-
Flashing er output is OFF.

208
9. Fault Diagnosis

Alarm Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-


Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Detected as Waiting to receive data. Check communications


an alarm devices.
only. Fault
contact out- Communications error • Baud rate setting
put is not ac- error
tivated. Communications are
not established
because the baud
rate of the master
and the Inverter are
not the same.


Correct the baud
rate setting of either
the master or the
Inverter so that the
Flashing rates will be same.

• MAC ID duplicated
Check whether the
MAC ID is dupli-
cated in another
device in the
DeviceNet network.


Correct the MAC ID
setting so that it is
not the same as that
of another device
and turn ON the
Inverter's power
again.

dE1(I/O message length The length of the polled


disagreement) I/O message registered
Inverter is not operating in the master and the
correctly because the I/O length of the connection
data was not sent cor- path set in n148 and
rectly from the master. n149 do not match.


Flashing Change the settings so
that the length of the
polled I/O registered in
the master will be the
same as the length of
the connection path set
in n148 and n149.

If the Run command is


ON when a fault is reset,
"rUn" will flash.
"rUn" stops flashing if the
Run command is turned
Flashing OFF.
Inverter will not operate
while "rUn" is flashing.

209
Alarm Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-
Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Detected as OP† (Constant setting Check the setting val-


an alarm error when constants are ues.
only. Fault set through MEMOBUS
contact out- communications)
put is not ac- OP1: Two or more val-
tivated. ues are set for
multi-function in-
put selection.
(constants n050
to n056)
OP2: Relationship
among V/f con-
stants is not cor-
rect. (constants
n011, n013,
n014, n016)
OP3: Setting value of
motor rated cur-
rent exceeds
150% of Inverter
Rated Current.
(constant n036)
OP4: Upper/lower limit
of frequency ref-
erence is re-
versed.
(constants n033,
n034)
OP5: (constants n083
to n085)
OP6: Multi-function An-
alog Inputs
(n077) and PID
Control Selection
(n128) are both
set to a value oth-
er than 0.

OL3 (Overtorque detec- Reduce the load, and in-


tion) crease the acceleration/
Motor current exceeded deceleration time.
Flashing the preset value in con-
stant n098.

SER (Sequence error) Check the external cir-


Inverter received LO- cuit (sequence).
CAL/REMOTE com-
mand or communica-
tions/control circuit termi-
Flashing nal changing signals
from the multi-function
terminal while the Invert-
er output is ON.

210
9. Fault Diagnosis

Alarm Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-


Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Detected as BB (External baseblock) Check the external cir-


an alarm BASEBLOCK command cuit (sequence).
only. Fault at multi-function termi-
contact out- nal is ON and the Invert-
Flashing put is not ac- er output is OFF (motor
tivated. coasting). Condition is
cleared when input com-
mand is removed.

EF (Simultaneous FWD/ Check the external cir-


REV RUN commands) cuit (sequence).
When FWD and REV
RUN commands are si-
multaneously input for
Flashing over 500 ms, the Inverter
stops according to con-
stant n005.

STP (Operator function Check the external cir-


stop) cuit (sequence).

was pressed
during running via a con-
trol circuit terminal FWD/
REV command, or by a
RUN command from
communications. The In-
Flashing or verter stops according to
constant n005.
STP (Emergency stop) Check the external cir-
Inverter received emer- cuit (sequence).
gency stop alarm signal.
Inverter stops according
to constant n005.

FAN (Cooling fan fault) Check the following:


Cooling fan is locked. • Cooling fan
• Cooling fan connec-
Flashing tion

FBL (PID feedback loss Check the mechanical


detection) system and correct the
PID feedback value cause, or increase the
dropped below the de- value of n137.
tection level. When PID
Flashing feedback loss is detect-
ed, the Inverter operates
according to the n136
setting.

A communications fault Check communications


occurred. signals.

Flashing

211
Alarm Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-
Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Detected as UL3 (Undertorque detec- • Check the setting in


an alarm tion) n118.
only. Fault When V/f mode is select- • Check the operating
contact out- ed: The Inverter’s output conditions, and
put is not ac- current was less than the remove the cause.
tivated. undertorque detection
level (n118).
When vector mode is se-
lected: The output cur-
Flashing rent or output torque was
less than the detection
level (n097 or n118).
Operation when
undertorque is detected
will be determined by the
setting in n117.

OH3 (Inverter overheat • Clear the multi-func-


alarm) tion input terminal’s
The Inverter overheat Inverter overheat
alarm (OH3) was input alert input.
from a multi-function input
terminal (S1 and S7).
or
Flashing

212
9. Fault Diagnosis

Fault Displays and Meanings


Fault Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-
Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Protective OV (Main circuit • Insufficient


Operation overvoltage) Deceleration Time
Output is Main circuit DC voltage (constants n020 and
turned OFF exceeded the n022)
and motor overvoltage detection • Lowering of negative
coasts to a level because of exces- load (e.g., elevator)
stop. sive regenerative ener-
gy from the motor. ⇓
Detection level: • Increase
200 V: Stop at main cir- deceleration time.
cuit DC voltage • Connect optional
below approx. braking resistor.
410 V
400 V: Stops at main cir-
cuit DC voltage of
approx. 820 V or
more

UV1 (Main circuit low • Reduction of input


voltage) power supply volt-
Main circuit DC voltage age
dropped below the low- • Open phase of input
voltage detection level supply
while the Inverter output • Momentary power
is ON. loss
200 V: Stops at main cir- ⇓
cuit DC voltage Check the following:
below approx. • Power supply volt-
200 V (160 V for age
single-phase) • Main circuit power
400 V: Stops at main cir- supply connections
cuit DC voltage of • Terminal screws:
approx. 400 V or Loose?
more

UV2 (Control power sup- Cycle power. If the fault


ply fault) remains, replace the In-
Voltage fault of control verter.
power supply was de-
tected.

OH (Cooling fin over- • Excessive load


heat) • Improper V/f pattern
Temperature increased setting
because of Inverter over- • Insufficient
load operation or intake acceleration time if
air temperature rise. the fault occurs dur-
ing acceleration
• Intake air tempera-
ture exceeding 50°C
(122°F)
• Cooling fan stops.


Check the following:
• Load size
• V/f pattern setting
(constants n011 to
n017)
• Intake air tempera-
ture.

213
Fault Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-
Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Protective OC (Overcurrent) • Short circuit or


Operation Inverter output current grounding at Inverter
Output is momentarily exceeded output side
turned OFF approx. 250% of rated • Excessive load GD2
and motor current. • Extremely rapid
coasts to a Acceleration/
stop. Deceleration Time
(constants n019 to
n022)
• Special motor used
• Starting motor dur-
ing coasting
• Motor of a capacity
greater than the
Inverter rating has
been started.
• Magnetic contactor
opened/closed at
the Inverter output
side

OL1 (Motor overload) • Check the load size


Motor overload protec- or V/f pattern setting
tion operated by built-in (constants n011 to
electronic thermal over- n017).
load relay. • Set the motor rated
current shown on
the nameplate in
constant n036.

OL2 (Inverter overload) • Check the load size


Inverter overload protec- or V/f pattern setting
tion operated by built-in (constants n011 to
electronic thermal over- n017).
load relay. • Check the Inverter
capacity.

OL3 (Overtorque detec- Check the driven ma-


tion) chine and correct the
V/f mode: Inverter output cause of the fault, or in-
current exceeded the crease the value of con-
preset value in constant stant n098 up to the
n098. highest value allowed for
Vector mode: Motor cur- the machine.
rent or torque exceeded
the preset value in con-
stants n097 and n098.
When overtorque is de-
tected, Inverter per-
forms operation
according to the preset
setting of constant n096.

214
9. Fault Diagnosis

Fault Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-


Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Protective PF (Main circuit voltage • Open phase of input


Operation fault) supply
Output is The main circuit’s DC • Momentary power
turned OFF voltage oscillated in an ir- loss
and motor regular way when not in • Excessive fluctua-
coasts to a regenerative operation. tion in input supply
stop. voltage
• Unbalanced line
voltage


Check the following:
• Main circuit power
supply connections
• Power supply volt-
age
• Terminal screws:
Loose?

LF (Output open phase) • Disconnection in


An open phase occurred output cable
in Inverter output. • Disconnection in
motor windings
• Loose output termi-
nal screws

Check the following:
• Disconnection in
output wirings
• Motor impedance
• Terminal screws:
Loose?

UL3 (Undertorque detec- • Check the setting in


tion) n118.
When V/f mode is select- • Check the operating
ed: The Inverter’s output conditions, and
current was less than the remove the cause.
Undertorque Detection
Level (n118).
When vector mode is se-
lected:
The output current or out-
put torque was less than
the detection level (n097
to n118).
Operation when
undertorque is detected
will be determined by the
setting in n117.

215
Fault Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-
Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Protective EF† (External fault) Check the external cir-


Operation Inverter receives an ex- cuit (sequence).
Output is ternal fault input from
turned OFF control circuit terminal.
and motor EF0: External fault ref-
coasts to a erence through
stop. DeviceNet com-
munications
EF1: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal S1
EF2: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal S2
EF3: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal S3
EF4: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal S4
EF5: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal S5
(See note.)
EF6: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal
S6(See note.)
EF7: External fault in-
put command
from control cir-
cuit terminal
S7(See note.)

CPF-00 Cycle power after con-


Inverter cannot commu- firming that the Digital
nicate with the Digital Operator is securely
Operator for 5 s or more mounted. If the fault re-
when power is turned mains, replace the Digi-
ON. tal Operator or Inverter.

CPF-01 Cycle power after con-


Transmission fault oc- firming that the Digital
curred for 5 s or more Operator is securely
when transmission starts mounted. If the fault re-
with the Digital Operator. mains, replace the Digi-
tal Operator or Inverter.

CPF-04 • Record all constant


EEPROM fault of Invert- data and initialize
er control circuit was de- the constants.
tected. (Refer to page 52 for
constant initializa-
tion.)
• Cycle power. If the
fault remains,
replace the Inverter.

Note: These terminals can be used only from DeviceNet communications.


There are no corresponding external input terminals.

216
9. Fault Diagnosis

Fault Display Inverter Description Causes and Correc-


Status tive Actions
Digital RUN (Green)
Operator ALARM (Red)

Protective CPF-05 Cycle power.


Operation AD converter fault was If the fault remains, re-
Output is detected. place the Inverter.
turned OFF
and motor CPF-06 Remove power to the In-
coasts to a • Option card connec- verter. Check the con-
stop. tion fault nection of the Digital
• A non-correspond- Operator. Verify Soft-
ing option card is ware Version No. (n179).
connected.

CPF-07 Cycle power after check-


Operator control circuit ing the Digital Operator
(EEPROM or AD con- is securely mounted. If
verter) fault the fault remains, re-
place the Digital Opera-
tor or Inverter.

OPR (Operator connect- Cycle power. If the fault


ing fault) remains, replace the In-
verter.

Stops ac- STP (Emergency stop) Check the external cir-


cording to The Inverter stopped ac- cuit (sequence).
constant cording to constant n005
after receiving the emer-
gency stop fault signal.

FBL (PID feedback loss Check the mechanical


detection) system and correct the
PID feedback value cause, or increase the
or dropped below the de- value of n137.
tection level. When PID
feedback loss is detect-
ed, the Inverter operates
according to the n136
setting.

Communications have Check the status of the


not been established DeviceNet communica-
with the DeviceNet Mas- tions indicators.
ter.

Protective • Insufficient power Check the following:


Operation supply voltage • Power supply volt-
Output is • Control power sup- age
turned OFF ply fault • Main circuit power
and motor • Hardware fault supply connections
(OFF) coasts to a • Terminal screws:
stop. Loose?
• Control sequence.
• Replace the Inverter.

Note: To display or clear the fault history, refer to page 52.

217
† Errors Indicated by the DeviceNet Communications
Indicators
The following table shows the errors indicated by the MS and NS indi-
cators on the Inverter, the likely causes of the errors, and the recom-
mended corrective actions.

Indicator Status Meaning Cause Corrective Action

MS NS

Power Power is not being Check the Inverter’s


supply supplied to the main circuit wiring and
OFF Inverter. turn ON the power.

- Initializing There is an incor- Correct the baud rate or


communi- rect baud rate set- MAC ID setting and turn
Green cations ting or there is a ON the Inverter’s power
MAC ID duplication. again. Replace the
Inverter if the problem
recurs.

- Recover- There was a non-fa- Replace the Inverter if


able (non- tal error. the problem recurs.
Red fatal) error

Irrecover- A fatal error related Turn ON the Inverter’s


able (fatal) to communications power again. Replace
Red error occurred. the Inverter if the prob-
lem recurs.

Communi- A communications • Check that the termi-


cations timeout occurred nators are properly
Green Red timeout with the Master. connected to the
or communications
line.
• Check that the com-
munications lines
Red are properly con-
nected. (Check for
cable damage and
bad connections.)
• Check that the com-
munications lines
are separated from
the main circuit wir-
ing.

218
9. Fault Diagnosis

Indicator Status Meaning Cause Corrective Action

MS NS

Communi- An error occurred • Check whether the


cations that disables com- MAC ID is dupli-
Green Red error munications. cated in another
or device in the
DeviceNet network.
• Check that the Mas-
ter is operating prop-
Red erly.
• Check that the termi-
nators are properly
connected to the
communications
line.
• Check that the com-
munications lines
are properly con-
nected. (Check for
cable damage and
bad connections.)
• Check that the com-
munications lines
are separated from
the main circuit wir-
ing.

Normal No error occurred, When necessary, send


status (No but communications Explicit message or I/O
Green Green data com- have not been es- message communica-
munica- tablished with the tions from the Master.
tions) Master.

Normal Normal communi- -


status cations have been
Green Green (Data established.
communi-
cations
estab-
lished)

219
„ Troubleshooting

Trouble Cause Corrective Actions

Communications Communications cable is Check if the connector is incorrectly


disabled with incorrectly connected. connected or disconnected. Make
DeviceNet master. sure that the communications cable is
correctly connected.

Baud rate is incorrectly set. Set the baud rate to the same value
as that of the DeviceNet master, and
turn ON the power supply again.

MAC ID is already used by another Change the MAC ID so that it will not
device. be the same as that of any other
device, and turn ON the power supply
again.

Terminator is incorrectly Check that the terminator is


connected or not connected on the connected correctly on the
communications line. communications line.

DeviceNet master does not Check that the DeviceNet master is


operate. always operating correctly.

Although DeviceNet Incorrect operation method is Set Run command selection (n003) to
communications selected. DeviceNet communications.
established, the Selection of operation Run command
Inverter does not run selection (n003) is not set to
when an operation is DeviceNet communications.
started by the
DeviceNet master.

The motor does not The operation method selection is Set the run command (n003) to
operate when an wrong. Control Circuit Terminal.
external operation The run command (n003) is not set to
signal is input. Control Circuit Terminal.

A 3-wire sequence is in effect. To use a 3-wire sequence, make the


The multi-function input method wiring so that the S2 control terminal
(n052) is set to 3-wire sequence, and is closed. To use a 2-wire sequence,
the S2 control terminal is not closed. set the multi-function input (n052) to a
value other than 3-wire sequence.

The frequency reference is too low. Input a frequency reference greater


The input frequency reference is than the min. output frequency
lower than the setting for the (n016).
min.output frequency (n016).

Local mode is in effect. Set the LO/RE selection of the digital


operator to RE.

220
9. Fault Diagnosis

Trouble Cause Corrective Actions

The motor stops. The The stall prevention level during Check if the stall prevention level
torque is not output. acceleration is too low. during acceleration (n093) is set to an
Because the stall prevention level appropriate value.
during acceleration (n093) is set too
low, the output current reaches the
set level, the output frequency is
stopped, and the acceleration time is
lengthened.

The stall prevention level during Check if the stall prevention level
running is too low. during running (n094) is set to an
Because the stall prevention level appropriate value.
during running (n094) is set too low,
the output current reaches the set
level, and the speed drops.

The load is too heavy. • Lengthen the set acceleration time


If the load is too heavy, stall (n019).
prevention is activated, the output • Reduce the load.
frequency is stopped, and the
acceleration time is lengthened.

When the maximum frequency was To increase the speed of a general-


changed, the maximum voltage purpose motor, only change the
frequency was also changed. maximum frequency (n011).

The V/f set value is too low. Set the V/f (n011 to n017) according
to the load characteristics.

221
Trouble Cause Corrective Actions

The motor speed is The stall prevention level during Check if the stall prevention level
unstable. The motor running is too low. during running (n094) is set to an
speed fluctuates when Because the stall prevention level appropriate value.
operating with a light during running (n094) is too low, the
load. output current reaches the set level
and the speed drops.

The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.


If the load is too heavy, stall
prevention is activated, the output
frequency is stopped, and the
acceleration time is lengthened.

The carrier frequency is too high. Decrease the carrier frequency


If operating the motor with a light load, (n080).
a high carrier frequency may cause
the motor speed to fluctuate.

The V/f set value is too high for a Set the V/f (n011 to 017) according to
low speed operation. the load characteristics.
Because the set value for the V/f is
too high, over-excitation occurs at low
speeds.

The maximum frequency and base Set the maximum frequency (n011)
frequency were incorrectly and the base frequency (n013)
adjusted. according to the motor specifications.
Example: To operate a 60 Hz motor at
40 Hz or less, the maximum
frequency and base frequency are set
to 40 Hz.

The inverter is used for an Do not use the V7 inverter for an


operation at 1.5 Hz or less. operation that runs at 1.5 Hz or less.
For an operation at 1.5 Hz or less,
use a different inverter model.

The analog reference input is Increase the set value for the filter
unstable and has noise time constant (n070).
interference.

The digital operator The power is not being supplied. Check if the power is being supplied.
does not turn ON. The breaker or other component on
the power input side is not turned ON,
and the power is being not supplied.

The digital operator is not correctly Mount the digiral operator correctly.
mounted.
Because the digital operator is not
correctly mounted, the display does
not appear.

222
10. Specifications

10. Specifications
„ Standard Specifications (200 V Class)
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase

Model 3- 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B3P7 - -
phase

Max. Applicable 0.1 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
Motor Output kW*1

Inverter 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7 9.5 13


Capacity
Output Characteristics

(kVA)

Rated Out- 0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5 25 33


put Current
(A)

Max. Output 3-phase, 200 to 230 V (proportional to input voltage)


Voltage (V) Single-phase, 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)

Max. Output 400 Hz (Programmable)


Frequency
(Hz)

Rated Input 3-phase, 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz


Voltage and Single-phase, 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Supply

Frequency

Allowable −15 to +10%


Voltage Fluc-
tuation

Allowable ±5%
Frequency
Fluctuation

223
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase

Model 3- 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B3P7 - -
phase

Control Sine wave PWM (V/f control/vector control selectable)


Method

Frequency 0.1 to 400 Hz


Control
Range

Frequency Digital reference: ±0.01% (−10 to 50°C)


Accuracy Analog reference: ±0.5% (25 ±10°C)
(Tempera-
ture Change)

Frequency Digital reference:


Setting Res- 0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz)/0.1 Hz (100 Hz or more)
olution Analog reference: 1/1000 of max. output frequency

Output Fre- 0.01 Hz


Control Characteristics

quency Res-
olution

Overload 150% rated output current for one minute


Capacity

Frequency 0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), frequency setting potentiometer


Reference (Selectable)
Signal

Acceleration/ 0.00 to 6000 s


Deceleration (Acceleration/deceleration time are independently programmed.)
Time

Braking Short-term average deceleration torque*2


Torque 0.1, 0.25 kW (0.13 HP, 0.25 HP): 150%
0.55, 1.1 kW (0.5 HP, 1 HP): 100%
1.5 kW (2 HP): 50%
2.2 kW (3 HP) or more: 20%
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20% (150% with optional brak-
ing resistor, braking transistor built-in)

V/f Charac- Possible to program any V/f pattern


teristics

* 1. Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.


* 2. Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60 Hz
with the shortest possible deceleration time.

224
10. Specifications

Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase

Model 3- 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B3P7 - -
phase

Motor Over- Electronic thermal overload relay


load Protec-
tion

Instanta- Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 250% of Inverter rated current


neous
Overcurrent

Overload Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of Inverter rated output cur-
rent

Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceed 410 V

Undervoltage Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 200 V or less (approx. 160 V or
Protective Functions

less for single-phase series).

Momentary Following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power loss is 15 ms
Power Loss or longer), continuous operation if power loss is approx. 0.5 s or shorter,
continuous operation.

Heatsink Protected by electronic circuit.


Overheat

Stall Preven- Can be set individual level during acceleration/deceleration, provided/not


tion Level provided available during coast to a stop.

Cooling Fan Protected by electronic circuit (fan lock detection).


Fault

Ground Fault Protected by electronic circuit (overcurrent level).

Power ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50 V or less. RUN indicator stays
Charge Indi- ON or Digital Operator indicator stays ON.
cation

Multi- Seven of the following input signals are selectable: Forward/reverse run
func- (3-wire sequence), fault reset, external fault (MA contact input), multi-step
Input Signals

tion speed operation, JOG command, acceleration/deceleration time select,


Input external baseblock (MA contact input), SPEED SEARCH command, AC-
CELERATION/DECELERATION HOLD command, LOCAL/REMOTE se-
lection, communication/control circuit terminal selection, emergency stop
fault, emergency stop alarm, UP/DOWN command, PID control cancel,
PID integral reset/hold
Output Functions

Multi- Following output signals are selectable (1 MA contact output (See note
func- 3.), 2 photocoupler outputs):
Output Signals

tion Fault, running, zero speed, frequency agree, frequency detection (output
Output frequency ≤ or ≥ set value), overtorque detection, undervoltage detection,
minor error, baseblock, operating mode, Inverter run ready, fault retry, UV,
speed search, PID feedback loss detection

Standard Voltage vector control, full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensa-
Functions tion, DC injection braking current/time at startup/stop frequency reference
bias/gain, PID control, energy-saving control, constant copy, frequency
reference with built-in potentiometer, unit selection for frequency refer-
ence setting/display

225
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase

Model 3- 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B3P7 - -
phase

Status RUN, ALARM, MS, and NS provided as standard indicators


Indica-
tors
Indications

Digital Provided for monitor frequency reference, output frequency, output cur-
Opera- rent
Other Functions

tor
(JVOP
-140)

Terminals Main circuit: screw terminals


Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal

Wiring Dis- 100 m (328 ft) or less*2


tance
between
Inverter and
Motor

Enclosure Open chassis IP20, Open chassis IP20 (top closed type), or enclosed
wall-mounted NEMA 1 (TYPE 1)

Cooling Method Cooling fan is provided for the following models:


200 V, 0.75 kW or larger Inverters (3-phase)
200 V, 1.5 kW or larger Inverters (single-phase)
Other models are self-cooling.

Ambient Open chassis IP20: −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)


Temperature Open chassis IP20 (top closed type) and enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1
(TYPE 1): −10 to 40°C (14 to 105°F) (not frozen)
Environmental Conditions

Humidity 95% or less (non-condensing)

Storage Tem- −20 to 60°C (−4 to 140°F)


perature

Location Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)

Elevation 1,000 m (3,280 ft) or less

Vibration Up to 9.8 m/S2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz,


up to 2 m/S2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz

* 1. Temperature during shipping (for short period).


* 2. For details, refer to Reducing Motor Noise or Leakage Current (n080) on
page 151.
* 3. There is no corresponding external output terminal.

226
10. Specifications

„ Standard Specifications (400 V Class)


Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase

Model 3- 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 43P7 45P5 47P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- - - - - - - - - -
phase

Max. Applicable 0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 3.7 5.5 7.5
Motor Output kW*1

Inverter 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5 7.0 11 14


Capacity
Output Characteristics

(kVA)

Rated Out- 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18
put Current
(A)

Max. Output 3-phase, 380 to 460 V (proportional to input voltage)


Voltage (V)

Max. Output 400 Hz (Programmable)


Frequency
(Hz)

Rated Input 3-phase, 380 to 460 V, 50/60 Hz


Voltage and
Frequency
Power Supply

Allowable −15 to +10%


Voltage Fluc-
tuation

Allowable ±5%
Frequency
Fluctuation

227
Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase

Model 3- 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 43P7 45P5 47P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- - - - - - - - - -
phase

Control Sine wave PWM (V/f control/vector control selectable)


Method

Frequency 0.1 to 400 Hz


Control
Range

Frequency Digital reference: ±0.01%, −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)


Accuracy Analog reference: ±0.5%, 25±10°C (59 to 95°F)
(Tempera-
ture Change)

Frequency Digital reference:


Setting Res- 0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz)/0.1 Hz (100 Hz or more)
olution Analog reference: 1/1000 of max. output frequency

Output Fre- 0.01 Hz


Control Characteristics

quency Res-
olution

Overload 150% rated output current for one minute


Capacity

Frequency 0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), frequency setting potentiome-


Reference ter (Selectable)
Signal

Acceleration/ 0.00 to 6000 s


Deceleration (Acceleration/deceleration time are independently programmed.)
Time

Braking Short-term average deceleration torque*2


Torque 0.2 kW: 150%
0.75 kW: 100%
1.5 kW (2 HP): 50%
2.2 kW (3 HP) or more: 20%
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20% (150% with optional brak-
ing resistor, braking transistor built-in)

V/f Charac- Possible to program any V/f pattern


teristics

* 1. Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.


* 2. Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60 Hz
with the shortest possible deceleration time.

228
10. Specifications

Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase

Model 3- 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 43P7 45P5 47P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- - - - - - - - - -
phase

Motor Over- Electronic thermal overload relay


load Protec-
tion

Instanta- Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 250% of Inverter rated current


neous
Overcurrent

Overload Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of Inverter rated output cur-
rent

Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceed 820 V

Undervoltage Stop when DC bus voltage is approx. 400 V or less


Protective Functions

Momentary Following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power loss is 15 ms
Power Loss or longer), continuous operation if power loss is approx. 0.5 s or shorter,
continuous operation.

Heatsink Protected by electronic circuit.


Overheat

Stall Preven- Can be set individual levels during acceleration/deceleration, provided/


tion Level not provided available during coast to a stop.

Cooling Fan Protected by electronic circuit (fan lock detection).


Fault

Ground Fault Protected by electronic circuit (overcurrent level).

Power ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50 V or less.


Charge Indi-
cation

Multi- Seven of the following input signals are selectable: Forward/reverse run
func- (3-wire sequence), fault reset, external fault (MA contact input), multi-step
Input Signals

tion speed operation, JOG command, acceleration/deceleration time select,


Input external baseblock (MA contact input), SPEED SEARCH command, AC-
CELERATION/DECELERATION HOLD command, LOCAL/REMOTE se-
lection, communication/control circuit terminal selection, emergency stop
fault, emergency stop alarm, UP/DOWN command, PID control cancel,
PID integral reset/hold
Output Functions

Multi- Following output signals are selectable (1 MA contact output (See note
func- 3.), 2 photocoupler outputs):
Output Signals

tion Fault, running, zero speed, frequency agree, frequency detection (output
Output frequency ≤ or ≥ set value), overtorque detection, undervoltage detection,
minor error, baseblock, operating mode, Inverter run ready, fault retry, UV,
speed search, data output through communication, PID feedback loss de-
tection

Standard Voltage vector control, full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensa-
Functions tion, DC injection braking current/time at startup/stop frequency reference
bias/gain, PID control, energy-saving control, constant copy, frequency
reference with built-in potentiometer, unit selection for frequency refer-
ence setting/display

229
Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase

Model 3- 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 43P7 45P5 47P5
CIMR- phase
V7*1C†
††† Single- - - - - - - - - -
phase

Status RUN, ALARM, MS, and NS provided as standard indicators


Indica-
tors
Indications

Digital Provided for monitor frequency reference, output frequency, output cur-
Opera- rent
Other Functions

tor
(JVOP-
140)

Terminals Main circuit: screw terminals


Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal

Wiring Dis- 100 m (328 ft) or less*2


tance
between
Inverter and
Motor

Enclosure Open chassis IP20, Open chassis IP20 (top closed type), or enclosed
wall-mounted NEMA 1 (TYPE 1)

Cooling Method Cooling fan is provided for the following models:


400 V, 1.5 kW or larger Inverters (3-phase)
Other models are self-cooling.

Ambient Open chassis IP20: −10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)


Temperature Open chassis IP20 (top closed type) and enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1
Environmental Conditions

(TYPE 1): −10 to 40°C (14 to 105°F) (not frozen)

Humidity 95% or less (non-condensing)

Storage Tem- −20 to 60°C (−4 to 140°F)


perature

Location Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)

Elevation 1,000 m (3,280 ft) or less

Vibration Up to 9.8 m/S2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz,


up to 2 m/S2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz

* 1. Temperature during shipping (for short period).


* 2. For details, refer to Reducing Motor Noise or Leakage Current (n080) on
page 151.
* 3. There is no corresponding external output terminal.

230
10. Specifications

„ Standard Wiring
Example of a model with Digital Operator and analog volume
DC Reactor Thermal Overload Braking Resistor
(Optional) Relay (Optional) (Optional)

Shorting bar*1

MCCB +2 +1 - B1 B2
R R/L1

( If a single-phase
)
power supply is being
used, use R and S.
S
T
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2 IM
FORWARD
RUN/STOP
W/T3
REVERSE
S1
RUN/STOP
EXTERNAL FAULT
S2 Ground
Multi-function (NORMALLY OPEN)
inputs S3
FAULT RESET
S4
SC P1
RUNNING

Shield
connection Multi-function
photocoupler
FREQUENCY AGREED

terminal
Shield P2 outputs
+48 VDC 50 mA max.

PC

Housing
V+ Red (Type:ZHR-3)
DeviceNet CAN_H P White
0 to 10V
CAN Digital CN2 VIN
communications Shield P
T/R operator P 4 to 20mA Multi-funciton
IIN
500 kbps max. CAN_L Blue 0V analog input*2
+24 VDC +/− 4% JVOP-140 MIN MAX GND
V- Black

Shielded P Shielded twisted-pair cable

*1 Shorting bar must be removed when connecting a DC reactor.


*2: A housing is required when using the CN2 terminal on the back side of the digital operator.
1m analog input cable (code no. WV201) is available for housing on request.
: Only basic insulation (protective class 1, overvoltage category II) is provided for the
control circuit terminals. Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to
conform to CE requirements.

231
Connection Example of Braking Resistor
Use sequencer to
break power supply
side on overload
relay trip contact

Braking resistor unit


overload relay trip contact

* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting n092 to 1 when using


a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration
time if this setting is not changed.
Terminal Descriptions
Type Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)

R/L1, S/L2, AC power supply Use main circuit power input. (Use terminals
T/L3 input R/L1 and S/L2 for single-phase Inverters.
Never use terminal T/L3.)

U/T1, V/T2, Inverter output Inverter output


W/T3

B1, B2 Braking resistor Braking resistor connection


Main Circuit

connection

+2, +1 DC reactor connec- When connecting optional DC reactor, re-


tion move the main circuit short-circuit bar be-
tween +2 and +1.

+1, - DC power supply DC power supply input (+1: positive −: nega-


input tive)*1

Grounding For grounding (according to the local ground-


ing codes)

232
10. Specifications

Type Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)

S1 Multi-function input Factory setting closed:FWD run Photo-


selection 1 open: REV run coupler
insulation,
S2 Multi-function input Factory setting closed:REV run 24 VDC,
selection 2 open: FWD run 8 mA
Sequence
Input

S3 Multi-function input Factory setting: External


selection 3 fault (NO contact)

S4 Multi-function input Factory setting: Fault reset


selection 4
Control Circuit

SC Multi-function input For control signal


selection common

P1 Photocoupler out- Factory setting: Run Photo-


Multi-function contact output

put 1 coupler
output
P2 Photocoupler out- Factory setting: Frequency +48 VDC,
put 2 agree 50 mA or
Output

less
PC Photocoupler out- 0V
put common

E Shield ground Connect to ground terminal .


terminal

Red V+ DeviceNet communications DeviceNet


power supply +24 VDC communica-
tions,
White CAN H DeviceNet communications 24 VDC
Communications

data high ±4%, up to


DeviceNet

500 kbps
Colorless Shield Shield wire

Blue CAN L DeviceNet communications


data low

Black V- DeviceNet communications


power supply GND

* DC power supply input terminal is not applied to CE/UL standard.

233
„ Sequence Input Connection with NPN/PNP
Transistor

When connecting sequence inputs (S1 to S4)


with transistor, turn the rotary switch SW1
depending on the polarity (0 V common: NPN side,
+24 V common: PNP side).
Factory setting: NPN side

Sequence Connection with NPN Transistor (0 V Common)

Varispeed V7

FORWARD RUN/STOP
REVERSE RUN/STOP
EXTERNAL FAULT (NO)
Multi-
function FAULT RESET
inputs

+24 V

234
10. Specifications

Sequence Connection with PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)

Varispeed V7
FORWARD RUN/STOP

REVERSE RUN/STOP

EXTERNAL FAULT (NO)


External
power Multi- FAULT RESET
supply function
+24V inputs

+24 V

235
„ Dimensions/Heat Loss (Unit: mm)
The following diagram shows the external dimensions and heat loss of
the open-chassis type (IP20).
2-d
H1
H

W1 D
H2

Fig. 1

4-d
H1
H

W1 D
H2

Fig. 2

236
10. Specifications

Dimensions in mm (Inches)/Mass in kg (lb)/Heat Loss (W)


Volt- Ca- W H D W1 H1 H2 d Mass Heat Loss (W) Fig.
age paci-
class ty
(kW) Heat- Unit Total
sink

200 V 0.1 68 128 91 56 118 5 M4 0.6 3.7 9.3 13.0 1


3- (2.68) (5.04) (3.58) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (1.32)
phase
0.25 68 128 91 56 118 5 M4 0.6 7.7 10.3 18.0 1
(2.68) (5.04) (3.58) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (1.32)

0.55 68 128 123 56 118 5 M4 0.9 15.8 12.3 28.1 1


(2.68) (5.04) (4.84) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (1.98)

1.1 68 128 143 56 118 5 M4 1.1 28.4 16.7 45.1 1


(2.68) (5.04) (5.63) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (2.43)

1.5 108 128 146 96 118 5 M4 1.4 53.7 19.1 72.8 2


(4.25) (5.04) (5.75) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.09)

2.2 108 128 155 96 118 5 M4 1.5 60.4 34.4 94.8 2


(4.25) (5.04) (6.10) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.3)

3.7 140 128 158 128 118 5 M4 2.1 96.7 52.4 149.1 2
(5.51) (5.04) (6.22) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (4.62)

5.5 180 260 185 164 244 8 M5 4.6 170.4 79.4 249.8 2
(7.08) (10.23) (7.28) (6.46) (9.60) (0.31) (10.14)

7.5 180 260 185 164 244 8 M5 4.8 219.2 98.9 318.1 2
(7.08) (10.23) (7.28) (6.46) (9.60) (0.31) (10.58)

200 V 0.1 68 128 91 56 118 5 M4 0.6 3.7 10.4 14.1 1


sin- (2.68) (5.04) (3.58) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (1.32)
gle-
phase
0.25 68 128 91 56 118 5 M4 0.7 7.7 12.3 20.0 1
(2.68) (5.04) (3.58) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (1.54)

0.55 68 128 146 56 118 5 M4 1.0 15.8 16.1 31.9 1


(2.68) (5.04) (5.75) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20) (2.20)

1.1 108 128 155 96 118 5 M4 1.5 28.4 23.0 51.4 2


(4.25) (5.04) (6.10) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.31)

1.5 108 128 171 96 118 5 M4 1.5 53.7 29.1 82.8 2


(4.25) (5.04) (6.73) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.31)

2.2 140 128 178 128 118 5 M4 2.2 64.5 49.1 113.6 2
(5.51) (5.04) (7.01) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (4.84)

3.7 170 128 195 158 118 5 M4 2.9 98.2 78.2 176.4 2
(6.69) (5.04) (7.68) (6.22) (4.65) (0.20) (6.38)

237
Volt- Ca- W H D W1 H1 H2 d Mass Heat Loss (W) Fig.
age paci-
class ty
(kW) Heat- Unit Total
sink

400 V 0.37 108 128 107 96 118 5 M4 1.0 9.4 13.7 23.1 2
3- (4.25) (5.04) (4.21) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.20)
phase
0.55 108 128 125 96 118 5 M4 1.1 15.1 15.0 30.1 2
(4.25) (5.04) (4.92) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (2.43)

1.1 108 128 155 96 118 5 M4 1.5 30.3 24.6 54.9 2


(4.25) (5.04) (6.10) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.31)

1.5 108 128 171 96 118 5 M4 1.5 45.8 29.9 75.7 2


(4.25) (5.04) (6.73) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.31)

2.2 108 128 171 96 118 5 M4 1.5 50.5 32.5 83.0 2


(4.25) (5.04) (6.73) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20) (3.31)

3.0 140 128 158 128 118 5 M4 2.1 58.2 37.6 95.8 2
(5.51) (5.04) (6.22) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (4.62)

3.7 140 128 158 128 118 5 M4 2.1 73.4 44.5 117.9 2
(5.51) (5.04) (6.22) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20) (4.62)

5.5 180 260 185 164 244 8 M5 4.8 168.8 87.7 256.5 2
(7.08) (10.23) (7.28) (6.46) (9.60) (0.31) (10.58)

7.5 180 260 185 164 244 8 M5 4.8 209.6 99.3 308.9 2
(7.08) (10.23) (7.28) (6.46) (9.60) (0.31) (10.58)

Note: When using a 5.5-kW or 7.5-kW Inverter (200 V or 400 V Class), the
Inverter can be used as an IP00 device if the top and bottom covers are
removed.

238
10. Specifications

„ Recommended Peripheral Devices


It is recommended that the following peripheral devices be mounted
between the AC main circuit power supply and Varispeed V7 input ter-
minals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
• MCCB (Molded-case Circuit Breaker)/Fuse:
Always connect for wiring protection.
• Magnetic Contactor:
Mount a surge suppressor on the coil. (Refer to the table shown
below.) When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the
Inverter, do not exceed one start per hour.

Recommended MCCB Magnetic Contactors and Fuses


• 200 V 3-phase

Varispeed V7 V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7**
Model 20P 20P 20P 20P 21P 22P 23P 25P 27P
1 2 4 7 5 2 7 5 5

Capacity 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7 9.5 13.0
(kVA)

Rated Output 0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5 25.0 33.0


Current (A)

MCCB type 5A 5A 5A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 50 A 60 A
NF30 (MIT-
SUBISHI)

Magnetic HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI-
contactor 7E 7E 7E 7E 10- 10- 20E 30E 50E
(Fuji Electric 2E 2E
FA Compo-
nents &
Systems)

Fuse (UL 5A 5A 5A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 50 A 60 A
Class RK5)

• 200 V Single-phase

Varispeed V7 V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7**


Model B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B3P7

Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7

Rated Output 0.8 1.5 3 5 8 11 17.5


Current (A)

239
Varispeed V7 V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7**
Model B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B3P7

MCCB type 5A 5A 10 A 20 A 20 A 40 A 50 A
NF30, NF50
(MITSUBISHI)

Magnetic HI-7E HI-7E HI-7E HI- HI- HI- HI-


contactor 10-2E 15E 20E 30E
(Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)

Fuse (UL Class 5A 5A 10 A 20 A 20 A 40 A 50 A


RK5)

• 400 A 3-phase

Varispeed V7 V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7**
Model 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 43P7 45P5 47P5

Capacity 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5 6.6 11.0 14.0
(kVA)

Rated Output 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 8.6 14.8 18.0
Current (A)

MCCB type 5A 5A 5A 10 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 30 A
NF30, NF50
(MITSUB-
ISHI)

Magnetic HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI- HI-
contactor 7E 7E 7E 10- 10- 10- 10- 20E 20E
(Fuji Electric 2E 2E 2E 2E
FA Compo-
nents &
Systems)

Fuse (UL 5A 5A 5A 10 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 30 A
Class RK5)

Surge Suppressors
Surge Suppressors Model Specifica- Code No.
DCR2- tions
Coils and Relays

200 V to Large size magnetic 50A22E 250 VAC C002417


230 V contactors 0.5 µF
200 Ω

Control relays 10A25C 250 VAC C002482


MY-2, -3 (OMRON) 0.1 µF
HH-22, -23 (FUJI) 100 Ω
MM-2, -4 (OMRON)

240
10. Specifications

• Ground Fault Interrupter:


Select a ground fault interrupter not affected by high frequencies. To
prevent malfunctions, the current should be 200 mA or higher and
the operating time 0.1 s or longer.
Example:
• NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1988
and after)
• EGSG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1984 and
after)
• AC and DC Reactor:
Install an AC reactor to connect to a power supply transformer of
large capacity (600 kVA or more) or to improve power factor on the
power supply side.
• Noise Filter:
Use a noise filter exclusively for Inverter if radio noise generated
from the Inverter causes other control devices to malfunction.
1. Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the Inverter
NOTE output circuit.
2. Do not connect a phase-advancing capacitor to the I/O
sides and/or a surge suppressor to the output side.
3. When a magnetic contactor is installed between the
Inverter and the motor, do not turn it ON/OFF during
operation.
For the details of the peripheral devices, refer to the cata-
log.

241
„ Constants List
• Constants That Can Be Changed during Operation
The constants whose numbers are shaded can be changed during
operation.
First Functions (Constants n001 to n044)
No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.
No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

001 0101H Constant Selection/Ini- 0 to 4, 6, 1 1 127


tialization 8, 9

002 0102 Control Mode Selection 0, 1 1 0 132


(Note 6) (Note 1)
(Note 6)

003 0103 RUN Command Selec- 0 to 3 1 3 137


tion

004 0104 Frequency Reference 0 to 9 1 9 138


Selection

005 0105 Stopping Method Selec- 0, 1 1 0 155


tion

006 0106 Reverse Run Prohibit 0, 1 1 0 139

007 0107 Stop Key Selection 0, 1 1 0 154

008 0108 Frequency Reference 0, 1 1 1 137


Selection in Local Mode (Note 5)

009 0109 Frequency Reference 0, 1 1 0 138


Setting Method From
Digital Operator

010 010A Detecting Fault Contact 0, 1 1 0 137


Of Digital Operator

011 010B Max. Output Frequency 50.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz 129


400.0 Hz

012 010C Max. Voltage 0.1 to 0.1 V 200.0 V 129


255.0 V (Note 2)
(0.2 to
510.0)

013 010D Max. Voltage Output 0.2 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz 129


Frequency (Base Fre- 400.0 Hz
quency)

014 010E Mid. Output Frequency 0.1 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 129


399.9 Hz (Note 8)

015 010F Mid. Output Frequency 0.1 to 0.1 V 12.0 V 129


Voltage 255.0 V (Note 2)
(Note 8)

016 0110 Min. Output Frequency 0.1 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 129


10.0 Hz (Note 8)

017 0111 Min. Output Frequency 0.1 to 0.1 V 12.0 V 129


Voltage 50.0 V (Note 2)
(Note 2) (Note 8)

242
10. Specifications

No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.


No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

018 0112 Selecting Setting Unit for 0, 1 1 0 144


Acceleration/decelera-
tion Time

019 0113 Acceleration Time 1 0.00 to Depend on 10.0 s 143


6000 s n018 setting

020 0114 Deceleration Time 1 0.00 to Depend on 10.0 s 143


6000 s n018 setting

021 0115 Acceleration Time 2 0.00 to Depend on 10.0 s 143


6000 s n018 setting

022 0116 Deceleration Time 2 0.00 to Depend on 10.0 s 143


6000 s n018 setting

023 0117 S-curve Selection 0 to 3 1 0 145

024 0118 Frequency Reference 1 0 to 9999 1 r/min 180 r/min 139


(Master Speed Fre- r/min
quency Reference)
(Note 6)

025 0119 Frequency Reference 2 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

026 011A Frequency Reference 3 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

027 011B Frequency Reference 4 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

028 011C Frequency Reference 5 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

029 011D Frequency Reference 6 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

030 011E Frequency Reference 7 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

031 011F Frequency Reference 8 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 139


(Note 6) r/min

032 0120 Jog Frequency 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 141


(Note 6) r/min

033 0121 Frequency Reference 0% to 1% 100% 142


Upper Limit (Note 6) 110%

034 0122 Frequency Reference 0% to 1% 0% 142


Lower Limit (Note 6) 110%

035 0123 Setting/displaying Unit 0 to 3999 1 4 196


Selection for Frequency
Reference

036 0124 Motor Rated Current 0% to 0.1 A (Note 3) 172


150% of
Inverter
rated cur-
rent

037 0125 Electronic Thermal Mo- 0 to 2 1 0 172


tor Protection Selection

038 0126 Electronic Thermal Mo- 1 to 60 min 1 min 8 min 172


tor Protection Time Con-
stant Setting

243
No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.
No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

039 0127 Selecting Cooling Fan 0, 1 1 0 174


Operation

041 0129 Acceleration Time 3 0.00 to Set in n018. 10.0 s - ---


6,000 s

042 012AH Deceleration Time 3 0.00 to Set in n018. 10.0 s - ---


6,000 s

043 012BH Acceleration Time 4 0.00 to Set in n018. 10.0 s - ---


6,000 s

044 012CH Deceleration Time 4 0.00 to Set in n018. 10.0 s - ---


6,000 s

244
10. Specifications

Second Functions (Constants n050 to n079)


No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.
No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

050 0132 Multi-function Input Se- 1 to 28 1 1 159


lection 1 (Terminal S1)

051 0133 Multi-function Input Se- 1 to 28 1 2 159


lection 2 (Terminal S2)

052 0134 Multi-function Input Se- 0 to 28 1 3 159


lection 3 (Terminal S3)

053 0135 Multi-function Input Se- 1 to 28, 34 1 5 159


lection 4 (Terminal S4)

054 0136 Multi-function Input Se- 1 to 28 1 6 159


lection 5 (Terminal S5)

055 0137 Multi-function Input Se- 1 to 28 1 7 159


lection 6 (Terminal S6)

056 0138 Multi-function Input Se- 1 to 28 1 10 159


lection 7 (Terminal S7)

057 0139 Multi-function Output Se- 0 to 21 1 2 164


lection 1

058 013A Multi-function Output Se- 0 to 21 1 1 164


lection 2

059 013B Multi-function Output Se- 0 to 21 1 0 164


lection 3

064 0140 Processing During Ana- 0: Process- 1 0 ---


log Frequency Refer- ing dis-
ence Loss abled
1: Process-
ing
enabled

068 0144 Analog Frequency Ref- −255% to 1% 100% ---


erence Gain 255%

069 0145 Analog Frequency Ref- −100% to 1% 0% ---


erence Bias 100%

070 0146 Analog Frequency Ref- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.10 s ---


erence Filter Time Con- 2.00 s
stant

071 0147 Analog Frequency Ref- −255 to 1% 100% ---


erence Gain 255

072 0148 Analog Frequency Ref- −100% to 1% 0% ---


erence Bias 100%

073 0149 Analog Frequency Ref- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.01 s ---


erence Filter Time Con- 2.00 s
stant

077 014D Multi-function Analog In- 0 to 4 1 0 162


put Function

078 014E Multi-function Analog In- 0, 1 1 0 164


put Signal Selection

079 014F Sequence Input Double 0, 1 1 0 ---


Reading Selection

245
Third Functions (Constants n080 to n119)
No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.
No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

080 0150 Carrier Frequency Se- 1 to 4, 7 to 1 4 (Note 4) 151


lection 9

081 0151 Momentary Power Loss 0 to 2 1 0 144


Ridethrough Method

082 0152 Automatic Retry At- 0 to 10 1 0 148


tempts times

083 0153 Jump Frequency 1 0.00 to 0.01 Hz (less 0.00 Hz 148


400.0 Hz than 100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100 Hz
or more)

084 0154 Jump Frequency 2 0.00 to 0.01 Hz (less 0.00 Hz 148


400.0 Hz than 100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100 Hz
or more)

085 0155 Jump Frequency 3 0.00 to 0.01 Hz (less 0.00 Hz 148


400.0 Hz than 100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100 Hz
or more)

086 0156 Jump Frequency Range 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz 148


25.50 Hz

089 0159 DC Injection Braking 0% to 1% 50% 150


Current 100%

090 015A DC Injection Braking 0.0% to 0.1s 0.5s 156


Time at Stop 25.5% (Note 2)

091 015B DC Injection Braking 0.0% to 0.1s 0.0s 150


Time at Startup 25.5%

092 015C Stall Prevention During 0.1 1 0 170


Deceleration

093 015D Stall Prevention Level 30% to 1% 170% 167


During Acceleration 200%

094 015E Stall Prevention while 30% to 1% 160% 168


Running 200%

095 015F Frequency Detection 0.00 to 0.01 Hz (less 0.00 Hz 147


Level (Multi-function 400.0 Hz than 100 Hz)/
Contact Output) 0.1 Hz (100 Hz
or more)

096 0160 Overtorque Detection 0 to 4 1 0 146


Function Selection 1

097 0161 Overtorque Detection 0.1 1 0 147


Function Selection 2

098 0162 Overtorque Detection 30% to 1% 160% 147


Level 200%

099 0163 Overtorque Detection 0.1 to 0.1 s 0.1 s 147


Time 10.0 s

100 0164 Hold Output Frequency 0.1 1 0 161


Saving Selection

103 0167 Torque Compensation 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 1.0 131


Gain

246
10. Specifications

No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.


No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

104 0168 Torque Compensation 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.3 s 131


Time Constant 25.5 s (Note 8)

105 0169 Torque Compensation 0.0 to 6550 0.01 W (less (Note 3) 131
Iron Loss than 1000 W)/
1 W (1000 W
or more)

106 016A Motor Rated Slip 0.0 to 0.1 Hz (Note 3) 132


20.0 Hz

107 016B Line to Neutral (per 0.000 to 0.001 Ω (less (Note 3) 132
Phase) 65.50 Ω than 10 Ω)/
0.01 Ω (10 Ω
or more)

108 016C Motor Leakage Induc- 0.00 to 0.01 mH (less (Note 3) 134
tance 655.0 mH than 100 mH)/
0.1 mH
(100 mH or
more)

109 016D Torque Compensation 0% to 1% 150% ---


Voltage Limiter 250%

110 016E Motor No-load Current 0% to 99% 1% (Note 3) 132

111 016F Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 (Note 8) 171

112 0170 Slip Compensation Time 0.0 to 0.1 s 2.0 s 171


Constant 25.5 s (Note 8)

113 0171 Slip Correction During 0, 1 1 0 133


Regenerative Operation

115 0173 Stall Prevention Auto- 0, 1 1 0 169


matic Decrease Selec-
tion

116 0174 Acceleration/decelera- 0, 1 1 0 170


tion Time during Stall
Prevention

117 0175 Undertorque Detection 0 to 4 1 0 ---


Function Selection

118 0176 Undertorque Detection 0% to 1% 10% ---


Level 200%

119 0177 Undertorque Detection 0.1 to 0.1 s 0.1 s ---


Time 10.0 s

247
Fourth Functions (Constants n120 to n179)
No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.
No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

120 0178 Frequency Reference 9 0 to 9999 1 r/min 180 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

121 0179 Frequency Reference 10 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

122 017A Frequency Reference 11 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

123 017B Frequency Reference 12 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

124 017C Frequency Reference 13 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

125 017D Frequency Reference 14 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

126 017E Frequency Reference 15 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

127 017F Frequency Reference 16 0 to 9999 1 r/min 0 r/min 140


(Note 6) r/min

128 0180 PID Control Selection 0 to 8 1 0 179

129 0181 PID Feedback Gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 182


10.00 Hz

130 0182 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 1.0 181

131 0183 Integral Time (I) 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 181


360.0 s

132 0184 Derivative Time (D) 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 181


2.50 s

133 0185 PID Offset Adjustment −100% to 1% 0% 182


100%

134 0186 Upper Limit of Integral 0% to 1% 100% 181


values 100%

135 0187 Primary Delay Time 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.0 182
Constant for PID Output

136 0188 Selection of PID Feed- 0 to 2 1 0 183


back Loss Detection

137 0189 PID Feedback Loss De- 0% to 1% 0% 183


tection Level 100%

138 018A PID Feedback Loss De- 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 1.0 183
tection Time

139 018B Energy-saving Control 0, 1 1 0 174


Selection (V/f Control
Mode)

140 018C Energy-saving Coeffi- 0.0 to 6550 0.1 (Note 7) 174


cient K2

141 018D Energy-saving Control 0% to 1% 50% 175


Voltage Lower Limit at 120%
60 Hz

248
10. Specifications

No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.


No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

142 018E Energy-saving Control 0% to 25% 1% 12% 175


Voltage Lower Limit at
6Hz

143 018F Power Average Time 1 to 200 1 = 24 ms 1 (24 ms) 176

144 0190 Search Operation Volt- 0% to 1% 0% 176


age Limit 100%

145 0191 Search Operation Volt- 0.1% to 0.1% 0.5% 176


age Step at 100% 100%

146 0192 Search Operation Volt- 0.1% to 0.1% 0.2% 176


age Step at 100% 10.0%

148 0194 DeviceNet I/O Produced 020 to 156 - 021 ---


Connection Path

149 0195 DeviceNet I/O Con- 020 to 106 - 63 ---


sumed Connection Path

150 0196 MAC ID Setting 0 to 63 1 0 ---

151 0197 DeviceNet Timeover De- 0 to 4 1 0 ---


tection Selection

152 0198 Baud Rate Setting 0 to 2 1 0 ---

153 0199 DeviceNet Speed Scale −15 to 15 1 0 ---

154 019A DeviceNet Current Scale −15 to 15 1 0 ---

155 019B DeviceNet Power Scale −15 to 15 1 0 ---

156 019C DeviceNet Voltage Scale −15 to 15 1 0 ---

157 019D DeviceNet Time Scale −15 to 15 1 0 ---

158 019E Motor Code (Energy- 0 to 70 1 (Note 7) 174


saving Control)

159 019F Upper Voltage Limit for 0% to 1% 120% 175


Energy-saving Control at 120%
60 Hz

160 01A0 Upper Voltage Limit for 0% to 25% 1% 16% 175


Energy-saving Control at
6 Hz

161 01A1 Search Operation Pow- 0% to 1% 10% 177


er Detection Hold Width 100%

162 01A2 Time Constant of Power 0 to 255 1 = 4 ms 5 (20 ms) 177


Detection Filter

163 01A3 PID Output Gain 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 1.0 182

164 01A4 PID Feedback Value Se- 0 to 5 1 0 180


lection

166 01A6 Input Open-phase De- 0% to 1% 0% ---


tection Level 100%

167 01A7 Input Open-phase De- 0 to 255 s 1s 0s ---


tection Time

168 01A8 Output Open-phase De- 0% to 1% 0% ---


tection Level 100%

249
No. Register Name Setting Setting Unit Factory User Ref.
No. for Range Setting Setting Page
Trans-
mission

169 01A9 Output Open-phase De- 0 to 255 s 1s 0s ---


tection Time

173 01AD DC Injection Braking 1 to 999 1 = 0.001 83 (0.083) ---


Proportional Gain

174 01AE DC Injection Braking In- 1 to 250 1 = 4 ms 25 (100 ms) ---


tegral Time Constant

175 01AF Reducing Carrier Fre- 0, 1 1 0 154


quency Selection At Low
Speed

176 01B0 Constant Copy Function rdy, rEd, rdy 186


Selection Cpy, vFy,
vA, Sno

177 01B1 Constant Read Selection 0, 1 1 0 187


Prohibit

178 01B2 Fault History Stores, dis- Setting dis- - 52


plays most abled
recent 4
alarms

179 01B3 Software Version No. Displays Setting dis- - 49


lower- abled
place 4
digits of
software
No.

Note: 1. Not initialized by constant initialization.


2. Upper limit of setting range and factory setting are doubled for 400 V
Class.
3. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to the next page.
4. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to page 152.
5. Factory setting of the model with JVOP-140 Digital Operator (with
potentiometer) is 0. Setting can be set to 1 by constant initialization.
6. The unit is determined by the value set for constant n035. For details,
refer to page 196. The unit is fixed to 0.01 Hz when inputting the fre-
quency reference using DeviceNet.
7. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to page 178.
8. When control mode selection (n002) is changed, factory setting corre-
sponds to the control mode. Refer to page 251.

250
10. Specifications

No. Name V/f Control Vector Con-


Mode trol Mode
(n002 = 0) (n002 = 1)

n014 Mid. Output Frequency 1.5 Hz 3.0 Hz

n015 Mid. Output Frequency Voltage 12.0 V* 11.0 V*

n016 Min. Output Frequency 1.5 Hz 1.0 Hz

n017 Min. Output Frequency Voltage 12.0 V* 4.3 V*

n104 Torque Compensation Time Constant 0.3 s 0.2 s

n111 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 1.0

n112 Slip Compensation Gain Time Con- 2.0 s 0.2 s


stant
* Values are doubled for 400 V Class.
Factory Settings That Change with the Inverter Capacity
• 200 V Class 3-phase
No. Name Unit Factory Setting

- Inverter kW 0.1 kW 0.25 kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW - 3.7 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
Capaci-
ty

n036 Motor A 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.3 6.2 8.5 - 14.1 19.6 26.6
Rated
Current

n105 Torque W 1.7 3.4 4.2 6.5 11.1 11.8 - 19 28.8 43.9
Com-
pensa-
tion Iron
Loss

n106 Motor Hz 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.5 2.6 2.9 - 3.3 1.5 1.3
Rated
Slip

n107 Line to Ω 17.99 10.28 4.573 2.575 1.233 0.8 - 0.385 0.199 0.111
Neutral
(per
Phase)*

n108 Motor MH 110.4 56.08 42.21 19.07 13.4 9.81 - 6.34 4.22 2.65
Leak-
age In-
duc-
tance

n110 Motor % 72 73 62 55 45 35 - 32 26 30
No-load
Current

251
• 200 V Class Single-phase
No. Name Unit Factory Setting

- Inverter Ca- kW 0.1 kW 0.25 kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW - 3.7 kW


pacity

n036 Motor Rated A 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.3 6.2 8.5 - 14.1
Current

n105 Torque Com- W 1.7 3.4 4.2 6.5 11.1 11.8 - 19


pensation Iron
Loss

n106 Motor Rated Hz 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.5 2.6 2.9 - 3.3
Slip

n107 Line to Neu- Ω 17.99 10.28 4.573 2.575 1.233 0.8 - 0.385
tral (per
Phase)*

n108 Motor Leakage MH 110.4 56.08 42.21 19.07 13.4 9.81 - 6.34
Inductance

n110 Motor No-load % 72 73 62 55 45 35 - 32


Current

• 400 V Class 3-phase


No. Name Unit Factory Setting

- Inverter Ca- kW - 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 3.7 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
pacity

n036 Motor Rat- A - 0.6 1.0 1.6 3.1 4.2 7.0 7.0 9.8 13.3
ed Current

n105 Torque W - 3.4 4.0 6.1 11.0 11.7 19.3 19.3 28.8 43.9
Compensa-
tion Iron
Loss

n106 Motor Rat- Hz - 2.5 27 2.6 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.2 1.5 1.3
ed Slip

n107 Line to Ω - 41.97 19.08 11.22 5.044 3.244 1.514 1.514 0.797 0.443
Neutral (per
Phase)*

n108 Motor Leak- MH - 224.3 168.8 80.76 53.25 40.03 24.84 24.84 16.87 10.59
age Induc-
tance

n110 Motor No- % - 73 63 52 45 35 33 33 26 30


load Cur-
rent

* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.

252
Revision History

The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the
bottom of the back cover.

MANUAL NO. TOE-S606-13B


C Printed in Japan September 2003 02-03 1
Revision number
Date of Date of original
printing publication

Date of Rev.
Section Revised Content
Printing No.
March 2002 − − First Edition
September 1 Preface Addition: Precautions for CE markings
2003
Chapter 5 Addition: Monitor items U-66, U-70
Chapter 9 Addition: Troubleshooting
January 2005 2 Preface Addition: ・Safety precautions
・Precaution about ground-
ing the supply neutral in the
WIRING section
・Precaution about using the
3-wire sequence in the
WIRING and OPERATION
section
・Precaution about storing a
constant with the ENTER
command by communica-
tions
・Warranty Information
Chapter 5 Partly revised
Chapter 6 Revision: “*3. Fault Code List” of “Control
Supervisor Object (Class 29
Hex)”
Date of Rev.
Printing No. Section Revised Content

January 2005 2 Chapter 7 Addition: ・Selecting Processing for Fre-


quency Reference Loss
(n064)
・Input/Output Open-phase De-
tection
・Undertorque Detection
Revision: PID control block diagram
Chapter 9 Addition: Alarm and fault display
descriptions
・Alarm: CAL, dE1, rUn, UL3,
oH3
・Fault: PF, LF, UL3
Chapter 10 Partly revised
Back cover Revision: Address
英文 No.4-4 (A4) メカトロ製品用 TOE

Varispeed V7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER
480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5696 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
MOTOMAN INC. HEADQUARTERS
805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone 1-937-847-6200 Fax 1-937-847-6277
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTD.A.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude-Sao Paulo-SP, Brazil CEP: 04304-000
Phone 55-11-5071-2552 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-312
Motoman Robotics Europe AB
Box 504 S38525 Torsas, Sweden
Phone 46-486-48800 Fax 46-486-41410
Motoman Robotec GmbH
Kammerfeldstraβe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone 49-8166-90-100 Fax 49-8166-90-103
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-877, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1805, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 20000, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION
4F., No.49 Wu Kong 6 Rd, Wu-Ku Industrial Park, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2298-3676 Fax 886-2-2298-3677
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone 852-2803-2385 Fax 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club, 21
Jianguomenwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone 86-10-6532-1850 Fax 86-10-6532-1851
TAIPEI OFFICE
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONGJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai China 200437
Phone 86-21-6553-6060 Fax 86-21-5588-1190
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing P.R. China Post Code: 100083
Phone 86-10-6233-2782 Fax 86-10-6232-1536
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic Technological Investment & Development Area,
Beijing 100076, P.R. China
Phone 86-10-6788-0551 Fax 86-10-6788-2878

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be
employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under
the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant
documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice
MANUAL NO. TOE-S606-13C
for ongoing product modifications and improvements. ○
C Printed in Japan January 2005 02-3 2
© 2002-2005 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 04-8⑥

You might also like